JP7374820B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows selection of performance modes.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that allows a selection of performance modes has been known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a performance mode selection screen is displayed in response to a push button being operated during a customer waiting demonstration. While the performance mode selection screen is being displayed, it is possible to select any one of the three types of performance modes.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-180876

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the performance effect may be reduced.
That is, in conventional gaming machines, if the game start condition is satisfied while the performance mode selection screen is displayed, and the sound effect continues to be played while the performance mode selection screen is displayed even after the game start condition is satisfied, There is a possibility that the presentation effect of the sound effects related to the game will be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to suppress deterioration of presentation effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention provides that if a game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the first effect sound during selection of the effect mode, the notification of the first effect sound is terminated. and the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started, and if the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the second effect sound is terminated. If the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the third effect sound triggered by the interruption of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the third effect sound is terminated. Notification of performance sound related to the game is started without being interrupted .
Further, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, if a game start condition is established during notification of the first performance sound during selection of the performance mode, the notification of the first performance sound is terminated, and the performance related to the game is If the sound notification is started and the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the second effect sound is not terminated and the game-related The notification of the effect sound is started, and the operation for interrupting the selection of the effect mode during the notification of the first effect sound is disabled.
In the gaming machine according to the first or second invention, if the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the first effect sound during selection of the effect mode, the notification of the first effect sound is terminated, and the effect related to the game is Sound notification starts. This prevents a situation in which the notification of the first performance sound overlaps the notification of the performance sound related to the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification of the first effect sound from interfering with the notification of the effect sound related to the game.
On the other hand, if the game start condition is met during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the effect sound related to the game starts without the notification of the second effect sound ending. be done. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player the selection of the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been confirmed.
As described above, in the present invention, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of a production mode has been confirmed, and to suppress a decrease in the production effect of production sounds related to a game.
Here, the game corresponds to a special game to be described later. Performance modes include performance modes A to C, which will be described later. The first performance sound corresponds to a mode explanation voice described later. Conditions for starting the game include entry of a game ball into starting ports 51 and 52, which will be described later, and acquisition of special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information). Performance sounds related to games include pending winning sounds, variable performance sounds, etc., which will be described later. The second performance sound corresponds to a mode decision voice described later.
In addition, "the notification of the effect sound is terminated" means that the effect sound is no longer audible, and the playback of the effect sound is ended (stopped), and the playback of the effect sound is continued. (hereinafter, the same applies).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, if the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the third effect sound triggered by the interruption of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the third effect sound is terminated. Instead, notification of sound effects related to the game is started. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the performance mode is to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been interrupted.
Here, the button sound effect c, which will be described later, corresponds to the third effect sound.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, it is prohibited to interrupt the selection of the performance mode while the first performance sound is being notified. As a result, the notification of the first effect sound will not be interrupted due to interruption of the selection of the effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the production effect of the first production sound.
Here, the operation for interrupting the selection of the production mode corresponds to a pressing operation of a down key button (back button), which will be described later.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing the parts especially necessary for explanation. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the sorting device viewed from above. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the sorting device viewed from below. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit. It is a block diagram showing the composition of an effect control board. This is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. It is a diagram showing the probability of winning a special symbol lottery. It is a diagram showing the selection probability of jackpot symbols. It is a diagram showing the selection probability of small winning symbols. It is a figure which shows the change of BIG bonus ratio according to a setting value. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main loop processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating evacuation processing when power is cut off. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing. 3 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing. 5 is a flowchart showing switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart showing special game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the number cut management process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening pre-opening process. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening control process. It is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening end wait process. It is a flowchart showing the second grand prize opening pre-opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening end wait process. It is a flowchart which shows special electric role opening/closing switching processing. It is a flowchart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric role opening/closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory release control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory closure effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening end wait processing. 3 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating pending command reception processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch command reception process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating variable command reception processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating stop command reception processing. 7 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing. It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to the performance mode A. It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to performance mode B. It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to performance mode C. It is a figure which shows the transition of a screen during a state of waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows an example of a production mode selection screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the data structure of a mode explanation voice. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the data structure of a mode decision voice. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the transition of sound effects when a press operation of various buttons is detected during playback of a mode explanation voice. It is a figure which shows the transition of the sound production when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction|regeneration of the mode explanation voice or the mode determination voice.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, a gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integral door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Moreover, the integral door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The frame body (outer frame) of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integral door unit 4 is formed into a rectangular door shape. The integrated door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed approximately in the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a. A firing handle unit 6 is disposed on the side of the saucer unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed into a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or semi-transparent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. A sound cutout part 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 5) is disposed is provided at each upper corner of the decorative part 4b. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 includes a tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, various operation means include a production button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), etc. ing.
The performance button 5b includes an operation section that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 5) that detects the press operation of the operation section. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the production control board 300 (see FIG. 5) every time the operating section is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operation section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 5) that detects the rotation operation of the operation section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the production control board 300 every time the operating section is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

The light amount adjustment button includes two operation parts (operation part A and operation part B) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 5) that detects the pressing operation of each of the operation parts A and B. It is composed of . The light amount adjustment switch 27 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the pressed operation part to the effect control board 300 every time each of the operation parts A and B is pressed down.
The effect control board 300 changes the setting content of the light amount setting to one of the first to fifth stages in response to the input of the detection signal from the light amount adjustment switch 27.
"Light intensity setting" is the setting of the light intensity (brightness) of various light sources for production (specifically, the light emitting elements that constitute the various lamps 20 and 21, the backlight that constitutes the main image display device 31, etc.). There is. Note that the setting of the amount of light cannot be changed for the light emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60 and the light emitting elements that constitute the performance display device 206, which will be described later.

The volume adjustment button includes two operation parts (operation part C and operation part D) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 5) that detects the pressing operation of each of the operation parts C and D. It is composed of . The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the pressed operation part to the production control board 300 every time each of the operation parts C and D is pressed down.
The performance control board 300 changes the setting content of the volume setting to one of the first to fifth stages in response to the input of the detection signal from the volume adjustment switch 28.
“Volume setting” is the setting of the volume of the sounds (effect sounds) output from the various speakers 22.

The cross key button consists of four operation parts (upper key button, lower key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the press operation of each operation part. 29 (see FIG. 5). The cross key switch 29 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the pressed operation part to the production control board 300 every time each operation part is pressed down.
The effect control board 300 changes predetermined setting contents regarding the effect in accordance with the input of the detection signal from the cross key switch 29.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, a lending operation section 7 is arranged. The rental operation section 7 includes a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 700 that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining power of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 700 is displayed on the power display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls that have been paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining value media remaining is inserted into the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, examples of the prepaid cart include a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operating portion (not shown), and a firing stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the integral door unit 4. A bearing portion (not shown) is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operating section is configured in a shape that allows it to be held by a player. A rotating shaft portion (not shown) is provided on the back side of the handle operation portion. The handle operation part is rotatably attached to the handle base part by having its rotating shaft part supported by a bearing part of the handle base part.
The handle operating section can be rotated (displaced) between a predetermined initial position and a predetermined limit position. Inside the firing handle unit 6, a biasing means (a spring in this embodiment) that biases the handle operating portion toward the initial position is arranged. As a result, the handle operation section is placed (displaced) at the initial position when no rotation operation is performed by the player.
The firing stop button is provided on the side of the handle operation section. The firing stop button can be pressed by the player.

Further, the firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411 (see FIG. 5), a touch sensor 412 (see FIG. 5), and a firing stop switch 413 (see FIG. 5).
Firing volume 411 is configured by a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section (the angle at which the handle operation section is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 is configured to include a rotation shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the rotation axis of the handle operation section. As a result, the rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is rotated in response to the rotational operation of the handle operating section, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 is changed according to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operating section.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection section 421 (see FIG. 6). The operation detection unit 421 detects a rotational operation (amount of rotational operation) of the handle operation unit based on a change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
The touch sensor 412 detects contact (grasping) of the handle operation section by the player based on a change in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 6) when the touch of the handle operation unit by the player is detected (the touch signal is set to high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops outputting the touch signal to the shooting enable condition detection section 422 (sets the touch signal to a low level) when no contact by the player with the handle operation section is detected.
The firing stop switch 413 detects a pressing operation of the firing stop button. Then, the firing stop switch 413 outputs a firing stop signal to the firing possible condition detection unit 422 (sets the firing stop signal to a high level) when no press operation of the firing stop button is detected. On the other hand, the firing stop switch 413 stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing possible condition detection unit 422 (setting the firing stop signal to a low level) when the pressing operation of the firing stop button is detected.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be explained.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing the parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the sorting device viewed from above. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the sorting device viewed from below.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached inside the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is placed on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. The player can visually check the game board 11 (game area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is configured between the back side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various performance devices (main image display device 31, movable body unit, etc.).

The set plate is formed into a box shape with an open front side. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided approximately at the center of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is made of resin and is formed into a flat plate shape. Approximately at the center of the game board 11, an opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front side of the game board 11, in which game balls shot out in response to the rotational operation of the firing handle unit 6 flow down. In the gaming area 30, there is a left path r1 formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) and a path along which the game ball flows down, and a left path r1 formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). The right route r2 thus formed is configured.
Further, in the game area 30 of the game board 11, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 5) is provided. The panel lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a that can display various effect images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a displays three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which the first effect pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and a second effect pattern z2 (not shown). It is possible to configure one second effect pattern display area a4 (not shown).
The first performance pattern z1 includes identification information (designs) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to execute a variable display and a stop display of the first performance symbol z1.
In this embodiment, each first effect symbol z1 is configured to include any one of identification information among identification information "1" to "7". That is, seven types of first performance symbols z1 (first performance symbols z1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined as the first performance symbol z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. There is. In addition, seven types of first performance symbols z1 (first performance symbols z1 that display each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined as the first performance symbols z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. There is.
The second effect pattern z2 is composed of color bars. In the second performance symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second performance symbol z2.

The variable display of the production symbols z1 and z2 means that the first production symbol z1 fluctuates in each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second production symbol z2 fluctuates in the second production symbol display area a4. It is displayed as follows.
In this embodiment, during the variable display of the performance symbols z1 and z2, the type of the first performance symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display position is changed in each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, or the type of the first performance symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display position is changed. The production symbol z1 is displayed in a moving state (moving/scrolling state), and the type of the second production symbol z2 displayed is changed in the second production symbol display area a4 (specifically, The colors represented by the color bar are changed sequentially).
The stop display of the production symbols z1 and z2 means that the first production symbol z1 stops at the lottery result display position in each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second production symbol z1 stops in the lottery result display position of each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3. The effect pattern z2 is displayed to stop.
In this embodiment, while the performance symbols z1 and z2 are being stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second performance symbol z1 is stopped. In the symbol display area a4, one type of second performance symbol z2 is stopped (specifically, the color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by a combination of the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure pending symbol display areas b1 to b3 (not shown) in which pending symbols h (not shown) are displayed.
In the pending symbol display area b1, a pending symbol h corresponding to the game information being displayed (fluctuating display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the pending symbol display area b2, a pending symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 1 starting information whose starting determination (notification display) to be described later is pending is displayed. In the pending symbol display area b3, a pending symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 2 starting information whose starting determination (notification display) is pending is displayed.

The left route r1 includes a first route part ra, a second route part rb provided on the downstream side of the first route part ra, and a third route part rc provided on the downstream side of the second route part rb. It is composed of:
The first route section ra extends from the exit/terminus of the firing route r3 (the entrance/starting end of the left route r1), which will be described later, of the left route r1, to the warp entrance 72 (the starting end of the second route section ra), which will be described later. This is the route that makes up the section up to.
A plurality of interference members (regulating members) p are provided in the first path portion ra along the direction in which the game balls flow down. Each interference member p is provided on the board surface of the game board 11 (specifically, on the front side of the member constituting the first path portion ra). Specifically, each interference member p is formed in a columnar shape and is provided so as to protrude from the board surface of the game board 11 toward the front side. Each interference member p interferes with the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra (regulates the game ball from flowing down the first path ra).
In particular, each interference member p is formed integrally with the board surface of the game board 11 (specifically, the front surface of the member constituting the first path portion ra) using a material such as resin, and it is difficult to adjust its angle. It is possible (difficult). In other words, each interference member p cannot adjust the interference situation/interference state (regulation situation/regulation state) (specifically, the adjustment of the angle by deformation) with respect to the game ball flowing down the first path section ra ( difficult).
The inner surfaces of the pair of side walls constituting the first path portion ra are configured to include a plurality of curved surfaces. Each curved surface is curved so as to be convex toward the outside so as to surround each interference member ra. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra is guided toward each interference member p by each curved surface.
The game ball flowing down the first path portion ra collides with each interference member p and passes on either the left side or the right side of the interference member p. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra is decelerated every time it collides with each interference member p, and flows down while meandering.
Here, in the first path part ra, as a member that interferes with the falling game ball (a member that restricts the flowing down of the game ball), the adjustment of the interference situation/interference state (regulation situation/regulation state) with respect to the game ball (specifically Specifically, there is no member provided that allows (easily) adjustment of the angle by deformation. That is, in the first path portion ra, as a member that interferes with the falling game ball (a member that restricts the flowing down of the game ball), a member formed of a material that can be (easily) deformed such as metal (for example, , nails, windmills, etc.) are not provided.

The second route section rb is a route that constitutes a section of the left route r1 from the terminal end of the first route section ra to the start end of the third route section rc.
A plurality of guide pieces g are provided in the second path portion rb along the direction in which the game balls flow down. Each guide piece g is provided on the inner surface of a pair of side walls constituting the second path portion rb. Specifically, each guide piece g is formed in a wedge shape when viewed from the front, and is provided so as to protrude from one side wall toward the other side wall of a pair of side walls forming the second path portion rb. It is being In this embodiment, a plurality of guide pieces h are provided on the pair of side walls constituting the second path portion rb so as to be alternated left and right along the direction in which the game ball flows down. Each guide piece g interferes with the game ball flowing down the second route portion rb (restricts the game ball from flowing down the second route rb).
The game ball flowing down the second path section rb is guided toward the other side wall by each guide piece g provided on one side wall, and each guide provided on the other side wall. It is guided towards one side wall by the piece g. As a result, the game ball flowing down the second path portion rb is decelerated every time it collides with each guide piece g, and flows down while meandering.
Here, in the second route part rb, as in the first route part rb, there is a member that interferes with the falling game ball (a member that restricts the flow of the game ball), and an interference state/interference state (restriction) with respect to the game ball. There is no member provided that makes it possible (easily) to adjust (specifically, adjust the angle by deformation) (conditions/regulation conditions). That is, the second path portion rb includes a member that is made of a material that can (easily) be deformed such as metal as a member that interferes with the falling game balls (a member that restricts the flowing down of the game balls). , nails, windmills, etc.) are not provided.

The third route section rc is a route that constitutes a section of the left route r1 from the terminal end of the second route section ra to a first starting port 51 or an out port 58, which will be described later. Here, the third route section rc includes a route (hereinafter referred to as a "specific route") that constitutes a section from a lower discharge port 79a to the first starting port 51, which will be described later.
Except for the specific route, the third route section rc is equipped with a member that interferes with the falling game ball (a member that restricts the flow of the game ball) to monitor the interference situation/interference state (restriction situation/regulation state) with respect to the game ball. A member is provided that allows for (easily) adjustment (specifically, adjustment of the angle by deformation).
Specifically, the third route portion rc is made of a material that can be (easily) deformed, such as metal, as a member that interferes with the flowing game ball (a member that restricts the game ball from flowing down), except for the specific route. A member (for example, a nail, a windmill, etc.) formed by
In the present embodiment, in the third route section rc (excluding the specific route), a plurality of nails, windmills, etc. are arranged so as to guide the game balls toward each winning hole (ball entrance) 51, 57a to 57d. has been done.

A sorting device 70 is provided on the left route r1. The sorting device 70 directs the entered (inflow) game balls to a path (specifically, a specific path (lower discharge port 79a)) that allows the balls to easily enter the first starting port 51, which will be described later. The balls are sorted to one of the routes in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 51 (specifically, a non-specific route (upper discharge port 78b) described later).
As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the distribution device 70 includes a warp path section 71, a stage section 76, and a distribution section 77.
The warp path section 71 guides the game balls that have entered the distribution device 70 among the game balls flowing down the left path r1 to the stage section 76. The warp path section 71 includes a warp entrance 72, a warp blade accessory 73 for opening and closing the warp entrance 72, a guide path 74, and a spiral path 75.
The warp entrance 72 is provided at the end of the first path section ra, and allows entry of game balls that have passed through the first path section ra (game balls flowing down the right path r2 cannot enter). possible). The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 72 flows into the starting end of the guide path 74.
The warp blade accessory 73 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the warp entrance 72, and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the warp entrance 72. It is possible to shift to. The warp blade accessory 73 is opened and closed by a warp blade solenoid 67 (see FIG. 5).
The warp feather accessories 73 are always opened and closed (displaced to an open state or a closed state) in an integrated pattern while the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on. As a result, the game ball that reaches the terminal end of the first path section ra at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is in the open state is guided by the warp blade accessory 73 and enters the warp entrance 72. . On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the terminal end of the first path section ra at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is in the closed state flows into the second path section rb without entering the warp entrance 72. .

The guide path 74 guides the game ball entering from the warp entrance 72 to a spiral path 75. The guide path 74 extends along the up-down direction (vertical direction). The lower end of the guide path 74 is open and located above the starting end of the spiral path 75. As a result, the game balls discharged from the lower end of the guide path 74 fall to the starting end of the spiral path 75.
A warp switch 111 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the guide path 74. The warp switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the warp entrance 72 (entering the game ball into the warp entrance 72). The main control board 200 executes predetermined processing in response to the detection signal input from the warp switch 111.
The spiral path 75 guides the game balls ejected from the guide path 74 to the stage section 76. The spiral path 75 is a ramp extending spirally when viewed from above. As a result, acceleration of the game ball passing through the spiral path 75 is suppressed. A drop hole 75a is provided at the end of the spiral path 75. The drop hole 75a is arranged above the left end of the stage section 76. As a result, the game ball that has fallen from the drop hole 75a falls to the left end of the stage section 76.

The stage section 76 swings (rolls and shakes) the game balls discharged from the warp path section 71 and then guides them to the distribution section 77 . The stage portion 76 is formed in a gutter shape (a gutter shape with an open top surface) extending in the left-right direction.
In particular, the bottom surface of the stage section 76 is sloped (curved) so that the central portion in the left-right direction is lower and the end portions in the left-right direction are higher. Furthermore, three guide grooves (not shown) are provided in the center of the bottom surface of the stage section 76 in the left-right direction. Each guide groove extends linearly along the front-rear direction and slopes downward toward the back side.
A plurality of protrusions f are provided on the left side of the stage section 76 in the left-right direction (the side where the game ball enters after passing through the warp path section 71) (hereinafter referred to as the "left side area"). Each protrusion f is provided on the inner surface of a pair of side walls that constitute the stage section 76. Specifically, each protruding portion f is provided so as to protrude from one side wall toward the other side wall of a pair of side walls (front side wall and rear side wall) that constitute the stage portion 76. It is being In this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions f are provided on the pair of side walls of the left side area so as to be alternated back and forth along the direction in which the game ball flows down. Each protrusion f interferes with the game ball rolling in the left side area.
On the other hand, a protruding portion f is provided in a region (hereinafter referred to as the “right side region”) on the right side in the left-right direction of the stage portion 76 (the opposite side to the side where the game ball enters after passing through the warp path portion 71). Not yet. That is, in the right side region, the inner surface of each side wall is formed into a planar shape.
Out of the pair of side walls that constitute the stage section 76, a discharge port 76a is provided in the center of the rear side wall in the left-right direction. The discharge port 76a is a substantially rectangular through hole when viewed from the front. The discharge port 76a is formed so that a game ball guided (guided) by three guide grooves can pass through (enter the ball). The discharge port 76a is arranged on the front side of a receiving section 78, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls discharged from the discharge port 76a flow into the receiving portion 78.
After passing through the left side area, the game ball that has flowed into the left end of the stage section 76 swings in the left-right direction on the bottom surface of the stage section 76, and is then guided by one of the guide grooves and passes through the discharge hole 76a. Then, it is discharged to the receiving part 78. At this time, the game ball passing through the left side area collides with each protrusion f provided on the side wall of one side, and is repelled toward the side wall of the other side. By colliding with each of the protrusions f, it is repelled toward one side wall. As a result, the falling situation (flowing state) of the game ball passing through the left area becomes irregular. Further, the time that the game ball stays (swings) on the bottom surface of the stage section 76 changes depending on the speed (momentum) etc. when the game ball passes through the left side area. As a result, the flowing down state (flowing state) of the game balls passing through the stage section 76 becomes irregular.

The distribution section 77 distributes the game balls discharged from the stage section 76 to either of an upper discharge port 78b and a lower discharge port 79a, which will be described later. The distribution section 77 includes a receiving section 78, a center passage 79, and a shutter accessory 80.
The receiving portion 78 is formed in a box shape and receives the game ball discharged from the discharge port 76a. The receiving portion 78 has an open front surface to form an upper discharge port 78b. The upper discharge port 78b is provided below the stage part 76 and above a roof member 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, and opens toward the front side. Note that the roof member 81 is not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4.
A center passage entrance 78a is provided on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78. The game ball that enters the center passageway entrance 78a flows into the starting end of the center passageway 79.
The shutter accessory 80 opens and closes the center passage entrance 78a. In particular, the shutter accessory 80 distributes the game balls that have flowed into the receiving portion 78 to either the center passage entrance 78a (center passage 79) or the upper discharge port 78b.
Specifically, the shutter accessory 80 is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the center passageway entrance 78a, and in a closed state that makes it possible (easily) for a game ball to enter the center passageway entrance 78a. It is possible to move to the open state and the open state. The shutter accessory 80 is opened and closed by a shutter accessory solenoid 68 (see FIG. 5).
The shutter accessory 80 is always opened and closed in an integrated pattern (displaced to an open state or a closed state) while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball that has reached the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 flows (falls) into the center passage entrance 78a at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the open state. On the other hand, the game balls that have reached the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the closed state are discharged from the upper discharge port 78b without flowing into the center passage entrance 78a. At this time, the game balls discharged from the upper discharge port 78b are discharged to a position above the roof member 81 in the third path portion rc. At this time, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to enter the first starting port 51. In other words, the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b flows into a path (hereinafter referred to as a "non-specific path") in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 51, and the game ball flows into the non-specific path. flows down.

The center passage 79 guides game balls entering from the center passage entrance 78a to a lower discharge port 79a, which will be described later.
The center passage 79 extends linearly in the up-down direction (vertical direction). A lower discharge port 79a is provided at the lower end of the center passage 79. The lower discharge port 79a is provided below the roof member 81 and above the first starting port 51, which will be described later, and opens toward the front side. In particular, the lower discharge port 79a is provided at a position directly above the first starting port 51. As a result, the game balls discharged from the lower discharge port 79a are discharged to a position below the roof member 81 in the third path portion rc, particularly to a position directly above the first starting port 51. At this time, the game balls discharged from the lower discharge port 79a can easily enter the first starting port 51. That is, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 79a flows into a path (specific path) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first starting port 51, and flows down the specific path.

The third route portion rc is provided with two upper left winning openings 57a, 57b and two lower left winning openings 57c, 57d. Each of the other winning holes 57a to 57d is a ball entrance opening that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other prize winning holes 57a to 57d is configured such that game balls flowing down the third path section rc can enter (game balls flowing down the right path r2 cannot enter).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning port switch 106 (see FIG. 5). The left winning hole switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other winning holes 57a to 57b (game ball entering the other winning holes 57a to 57d). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106.

A roof member 81 is provided downstream (below) of the upper discharge port 78b in the left path r1.
The roof member 81 is formed into a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction. The horizontal dimension of the roof member 81 is larger than the horizontal dimension of the first starting port 51. As a result, the opening of the first starting port 51 is hidden by the roof member 81 when viewed from above. In this embodiment, the horizontal dimension of the roof member 81 is approximately the same as the horizontal dimension of the upper discharge port 78b.
The upper surface of the roof member 81 is sloped (curved) so that the central portion in the left-right direction is higher and the ends in the left-right direction are lower. As a result, the game ball that has fallen onto the upper surface of the roof member 81 rolls on the upper surface of the roof member 81 and falls downward from the ends of the roof member 81 in the left and right direction.

A first starting port 51 is provided downstream (below) of the lower discharge port 79a in the left path r1. The first starting port 51 is a ball entry port (so-called "belly button") that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting port 51 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the left path r1 can enter therein (a game ball flowing down the right path r2 cannot enter therein).
A special figure 1 starting port switch 101 (see FIG. 5) is disposed within the first starting port 51. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 1 starting port switch 101.

A deceleration pocket 42 is provided at the most upstream side of the right path r2. The deceleration pocket 42 is a pocket that opens upward to the left, and allows game balls to enter at all times.
The board surface of the game board 11 is provided with a ball entry port 42a and a ball discharge port 42b. The ball entry port 42a is provided within the deceleration pocket 42. The discharge port 42b is provided on the downstream side of the deceleration pocket 42. Further, on the back side of the board surface of the game board 11, a back passage (not shown) is provided that connects the ball entry port 42a and the ball discharge port 42b. The back passage is formed into a substantially U-shaped tube.
All the game balls launched to the right path r2 flow into the deceleration pocket 42. The game balls flowing into the deceleration pocket 42 are decelerated by colliding with the peripheral wall of the deceleration pocket 42, and then flow into the back passage through the ball entrance 42a. Then, the game balls that have flowed into the back passage are discharged to the right side route r2 via the discharge port 42b.
As a result, the game ball launched to the right path r2 can be flown down the right path r2 after weakening its momentum, and it is possible to prevent damage to the game board 11 due to collision of the game balls. .

A starting gate 41 is provided downstream of the discharge port 42b in the right path r2. The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can pass through it at all times. The starting gate 41 is configured such that game balls flowing down the right path r2 can pass through it (game balls flowing down the left path r1 cannot pass through).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 5). Gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through starting gate 41 (passing of starting gate 41 by a game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

On the downstream side of the starting gate 41 in the right path r2, a right winning opening 59 is provided. The right winning hole 59 is a ball entrance opening that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The other right prize winning opening 59 allows the entry of game balls flowing down the right path r2 (it is impossible to enter the game balls flowing down the left path r1).
In the other right winning hole 59, a right winning hole switch 105 (see FIG. 5) is arranged. The right winning hole switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning hole 59 (the game ball entering the right other winning hole 59). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105.

A second starting port 52 is provided on the downstream side of the right winning port 59 in the right path r2. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second starting port 52. (Easy) A normal electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a that can be displaced is provided.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 5). Normally, the second starting port 52 has the normal electric accessory 52a in a closed state, making it impossible for game balls to enter the second starting port 52. The object 52a is opened, allowing the game ball to enter. The second starting port 52 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the right path r2 can enter therein (a game ball flowing down the left path r1 cannot enter therein).
A special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 5) is disposed within the second starting port 52. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball into the second starting port 52). Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 starting port switch 102.

A first big winning device 55 is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 52 on the right path r2. The first big prize winning device 55 is configured to include a first big winning opening 55a and a first special electric accessory (special electric prize) 55b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 55a.
The first special electric accessory 55b has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 55a, and a closed state that makes it possible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 55a. It can be easily moved to the open state and to the open position. The first special electric accessory 55b is opened and closed by a first special electric accessory solenoid 65a (see FIG. 5).
In the first big winning device 55, the first special electric accessory 55b is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 55a. While the state is occurring, the first special electric accessory 55b is brought into the open state, and the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 55a. The first big prize opening 55a allows the entry of game balls flowing down the right path r2 (it is not possible to enter the game balls flowing down the left path r1).
A first count switch 103a (see FIG. 5) is arranged inside the first big winning device 55 (first big winning opening 55a). The first count switch 103a controls the game ball that enters the first grand prize device 55 (first grand prize opening 55a) (the game ball enters the first grand prize device 55 (first grand prize opening 55a)) In response to the detection, a detection signal is output to the main control board 200. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the first count switch 103a.

A second big winning device 56 is provided downstream of the first big winning device 55 on the right route r2. The second big prize winning device 56 is configured to include a second big prize opening 56a and a second special electric accessory (special electric prize) 56b that opens and closes the second big winning opening 56a.
The second special electric accessory 56b has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second big prize opening 56a, and a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second big prize opening 56a. It can be easily moved to the open state and to the open position. The second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed by a second special electric accessory solenoid 65b (see FIG. 5).
In the second big prize winning device 56, the second special electric accessory 56b is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter the game ball into the second big winning opening 56a, but the small winning While the gaming state is occurring, the second special electric accessory 56b is brought into the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 56a. The second big prize opening 56a allows the entry of game balls flowing down the right path r2 (it is not possible to enter the game balls flowing down the left path r1).
A second count switch 103b (see FIG. 5) is disposed inside the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a). The second count switch 103b controls the game ball that enters the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) (the game ball enters the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a)) In response to the detection, a detection signal is output to the main control board 200. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the second count switch 103b.

In addition, the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) includes a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a). 56a) is provided with a sorting means 56c for sorting the game balls that have entered the ball into one of the V area and the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 5) is provided in the V-area. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, in response to the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110.
The distributing means 56c has a V passage state in which game balls that have entered the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) are distributed to the V area, and a V passing state in which the game balls that have entered the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) are distributed to the V area. ) and a non-V passing state in which game balls that enter the ball are distributed to the discharge area.
That is, when the distributing means 56c is displaced to the V passing state, all the game balls that enter the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) are distributed to the V area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distributing means 56c is displaced to the non-V passing state, all the game balls that have entered the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) are distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the second grand prize device 56 (second grand prize opening 56a) to pass through the V area.
The distribution means 56c is displaced by a V-area solenoid 66 (see FIG. 5).
The game ball that enters the second big prize winning device 56 (second big prize opening 56a) is first detected by the second count switch 103b, and then distributed by the sorting means 56c to one of the V area and the discharge area. It is distributed to one area, and after passing through that area, it is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110.

At the most downstream side of the gaming area 30, there is an out port for discharging game balls that did not enter (win) any of the winning holes (ball entrances) 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57d, and 59. 58 are provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. The discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls ejected from the game area 30) pass through the ejection path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 enters any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57d, and 59, or passes through the out hole 58, and enters the game ball. It is discharged from region 30 and flows into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game ball that enters each winning hole (ball entry hole) 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57c, 59 is activated by the switch 101, 102, 103a, 103b, After being detected by 105, 106, and 110, it is guided to the discharge path. Moreover, the game balls discharged from the out port 58 are guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 5). The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all the game balls ejected from the game area 30 (all the game balls launched into the game area 30) are detected by the out switch 109.

A main display device 60 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the game board 11. The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays various information regarding the game. That is, the main display device 60 includes a special map 1 display device, a special map 2 display device, a regular map display device, a special map 1 reservation display device, a special map 2 reservation display device, and a regular map reservation display device. , a round display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute a regular figure display device, and LED19 ~ The LED 23 constitutes a round display device, the LED 24 constitutes a right-handed display device, the LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 reservation display device, and the LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special symbol 2 reservation display device. However, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure reservation display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability change display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of variable display and stop display of a first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed using the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of variable display and stop display of a second special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed using the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) on the special symbol display device and the display of the production symbols z1 and z2 in the production symbol display areas a1 to a4 are based on the time when the variable display starts. , the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stop display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, if the first special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (specifically, a “jackpot symbol”), or if the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device, the stop symbol is displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. When the second special symbol (stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (specifically, a "jackpot symbol" or "small winning symbol"), a gaming state advantageous to the player (specifically, a jackpot symbol) A gaming state or a small winning gaming state) is generated.

The ordinary symbol display device is capable of fluctuating and statically displaying ordinary symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed using the stopped and displayed ordinary symbols.
Then, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (specifically, the "symbol per ordinary symbol"), a gaming state advantageous to the player (specifically, the ordinary symbol per A winning gaming state) is generated.

The special figure 1 pending display device displays information indicating the number of times (special figure 1 pending number) the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 game information) is pending. .
The special figure 2 pending display device displays information indicating the number of times (special figure 2 pending number) the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (start determination based on special figure 2 game information) is suspended. .
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is suspended (the number of regular symbols pending) is displayed on the regular symbol reservation display device.
The round display device displays information indicating the number of round games to be executed during the jackpot gaming state (type of jackpot gaming state).
Information indicating the route (left route r1 or right route r2) in which the game ball should be launched is displayed on the right-handed display device.
The time saving display device displays information indicating the current gaming state (whether time saving control is being executed or stopped).
Here, the pachinko machine 1 does not have a probability variation function (a function that varies the winning probability of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery). As a result, the probability variable display device is not used and no information is displayed on the probability variable display device.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or more movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, one or more movable units are arranged in the integrated door unit 4, and one or more movable units are arranged in the game board unit 10. Each movable body unit is a movable body for performance.
Each movable body unit of the integrated door unit 4 is disposed on the front of the decoration part 4b, the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as "performance space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation in the performance space.
Each movable unit includes a presentation member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 5) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The presentation member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the presentation member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a presentation position. The presentation member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the presentation member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives the light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the production control board 300 in response to the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projection section by the light reception section. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the production control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
Moreover, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the presentation member. Then, when the presentation member is placed at the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the position detection sensor 24 to block light from entering the light receiving part. As a result, when the production member is placed at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not placed at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the effect control board 300.
Thereby, the effect control board 300 is able to detect whether or not the effect member is placed at the initial position based on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a detection sensor that detects various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, as detection sensors, a glass frame open sensor 107, an inner frame open sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, etc. are provided.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the integral door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame open sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the integral door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame open sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11. The vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (vibration detection signal) to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration (vibration of the game board 11) with a strength exceeding a predetermined threshold.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is disposed in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, on the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. The magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of magnetism.

(Regarding the flow of game balls launched into the game area 30)
Next, the flow of game balls launched into the game area 30 will be explained.
When the player rotates the handle operation section, a game ball is launched into the game area 30 via the launch path r3. At this time, the momentum (initial velocity) of the game ball launched into the game area 30 changes depending on the amount of rotational operation of the handle operation section by the player. If the game ball launched into the game area 30 has weak momentum, it will flow into the left path r1 (specifically, the first path section ra), and if the momentum is strong, it will flow into the right path r2. .
The game ball that has flown into the first path section ra passes through the first path section ra and then flows into either the warp entrance 72 or the second path section rb. That is, the game ball that has reached the terminal end of the first path section ra enters the warp entrance 72 at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is in the open state. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the terminal end of the first path section ra at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is in the closed state flows into the second path section rb without entering the warp entrance 72. .
At this time, by providing a plurality of interference members p in the first path section ra, the time required from when one game ball is launched into the gaming area 30 until it reaches the terminal end of the first path section ra It is possible to make it irregular. As a result, it becomes possible to irregularly (randomize) the entry of game balls into the warp entrance 72 for the warp blade accessory 73 that opens and closes regularly.

The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 72 passes through the warp path section 71 and flows into the stage section 76. Further, the game ball that has flowed into the stage section 76 swings on the bottom surface of the stage section 76, and then flows into the receiving section 78 via the discharge port 76a. Then, the game balls that have flowed into the receiving portion 78 are discharged to the gaming area 30 (third path portion rc) again through either of the upper discharge port 78b and the lower discharge port 79a. That is, the game ball that has reached the bottom surface of the receiving part 78 at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the closed state is discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to a non-specific path without flowing into the center passage 79. On the other hand, at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the bottom surface of the receiving part 78 flows into the center passage 79 via the center passage entrance 78a, and passes through the lower discharge port 79a to a specific path. is discharged to.
At this time, the spiral path 75 constituting the warp path section 71 is a ramp extending spirally, a plurality of protrusions f are provided in the left side area of the stage section 76, and the bottom surface of the stage section 76 The time required for one game ball to enter the warp entrance 72 and reach the bottom surface of the receiving part 78 (shutter accessory 80) is made irregular by being inclined (curved) or the like. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to irregularly (randomize) the entry of game balls into the center passageway entrance 78a with respect to the shutter accessory 80 that opens and closes regularly.

The game balls discharged from the upper discharge port 78b fall onto the upper surface of the roof member 81, roll on the upper surface of the roof member 81, and are discharged to the left and right sides of the first starting port 51. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game balls discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to enter the first starting port 51, and the probability of the balls entering the first starting port 51 becomes low.
On the other hand, the game balls discharged from the lower discharge port 79a are discharged to a position directly above the first starting port 51. As a result, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge hole 79a can easily enter the first starting port 51, and the probability of the ball entering the first starting port 51 is increased.
On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the second route section rb flows into the third route section rc after passing through the second route section rb. Then, the game ball flowing down the third route portion rc is guided by a nail, a windmill, etc., and enters any one of the first starting opening 51, the other left winning openings 57a to 57d, and the out opening 58.
At this time, for the game balls that flowed from the second path section rb to the third path section rc, it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the first starting port 51, and the probability of the ball entering the first starting port 51 is low. Become.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, among the game balls launched into the left path r1, the game balls that flow into the third path section rc via the second path section rb are routed through the sorting device 70. A game ball flowing into the third path portion rc has a higher probability of entering the first starting port 51.
In particular, among the game balls flowing into the third path section rc via the sorting device 70, the game balls discharged from the lower discharge port 79a are more likely to be discharged from the lower discharge port 79a than the game balls discharged from the upper discharge port 78b. The probability of the ball entering the first starting port 51 increases.
As a result, it is possible to change the probability of a game ball flowing down the left path r1 to enter the first starting port 51 depending on the path the game ball flows down, and it is possible to improve the gameplay. Become.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the section from the starting end of the left path r1 to the warp entrance 72, the section from the warp entrance 72 to the lower discharge port 79a, and the period from the lower discharge port 79a to the first starting port 51, As a member that interferes with the falling game ball (a member that restricts the flow of the game ball), it is used to adjust the interference situation/interference state (restriction situation/regulation state) to the game ball (specifically, adjust the angle by deformation). ) is not provided.
This makes it possible to prevent the probability that a game ball launched toward the left path r1 will enter the first starting port 51 from varying depending on the aircraft.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 8 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 200, an effect control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply that supplies power to each control board 200, 300, 400, etc. It includes a plurality of control boards, such as a board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are mutually independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, and 600 is housed in an individual board case.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be explained.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 8, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 8, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates hexadecimal numbers).
The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including an unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area contains a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the program title and version. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data while the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1 is being executed. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a setting value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. It is composed of:

Setting values are stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. The error related area stores information regarding errors. In the normal game related area 1, subcommand pointers and the like are stored. The normal game related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results, game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 stores game information acquired in response to the input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 starting gate switch 101, the special figure 2 starting gate switches 102a and 102b, and the gate switch 104. (gaming information storage area, which will be described later).

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
During the execution of the program stored in the unused area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the work area is It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, the stack area is used to store programs stored in the unused area m2 (programs for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, or programs for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, in the RAM 230, an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the unused area M2.
On the other hand, the data stored in the unused area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test specified by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the used area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the used area It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 be rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 includes a first loop counter that generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a 3-loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. To generate a winning random number for a normal symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, from 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once by dividing the clock frequency by 32). Within the range), a reach group random number is generated by updating by 1. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame open sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. Detection signals etc. from are input.
The input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the firing enable condition detection section 422, and the like.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the first count switch 103a, a detection signal from the second count switch 103b, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, and a detection signal from the out switch 109. , the detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114, etc. are input.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special map 1 starting port switch 101, a detection signal from the special chart 2 starting port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. be done.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch/sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, and the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is set to "1". "0" is set when no detection signal is input (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to 4).
Output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60. The data signal output from output port 0 is then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a firing permission signal for detecting firing conditions described below, and the like. The common signal output from output port 1 is input to sink driver 240.
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 receives a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a, and a control signal for controlling the drive of the second special electric accessory solenoid 65b. Outputs a control signal for controlling, a control signal for controlling the V region solenoid 66, a control signal for controlling the drive of the warp blade solenoid 67, a control signal for controlling the drive of the shutter accessory solenoid 68, etc. do.
Output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of performance display device 206. The data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) to the production control board 300 from the command output port 1, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown). have.
The transmission data register outputs the input control command to the FIFO buffer based on subcommand transmission processing (step S2-4), which will be described later.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register, and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the production control board 300 or payout control board 400 as serial data.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is disposed on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming machine states (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine states") include a playable state, a settings change state, a settings confirmation state, a settings abnormal state, and a RAM abnormal state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes depending on the gaming machine state that is occurring.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display sections (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display section is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 become the first digit display section, LED41 to LED48 become the second digit display section, LED49 to LED56 become the third digit display section, and LED57 to LED64 become the third digit display section. is the fourth digit displayed.

While the game-enabled state is occurring, the game can be played. Then, while the playable state is occurring, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
In the present embodiment, during the occurrence of the playable state, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are displayed on the performance display device 206 at predetermined intervals (in the present embodiment, 5.0 [s]). , are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top two digits of the four-digit display section display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio). The lower two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. Then, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, ""r","n." in the upper 2nd digit, "-" in the upper 3rd digit), and the display section of the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. Then, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper 2nd digit, "n." is displayed in the upper 2nd digit, and the upper 3rd digit is not displayed), and the display section of the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area. Ru.

While the game is in a stopped state (abnormal setting state, abnormal RAM state, and abnormal backup state), it is impossible to proceed with the game. Then, while the game is stopped, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the gaming stop state is occurring (specifically, ""E","r." in the upper 2nd digit, no display in the 3rd digit) is displayed, and the display of the lower 1st digit indicates the error that has occurred (setting abnormality, RAM abnormality, or backup abnormality). A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation section that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operating section is pressed down.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from an OFF state to an ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation section is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to each display device 60, 206 according to the common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in accordance with the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in accordance with the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal line is controlled individually by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sync driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
This eliminates the need to provide the sink driver 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and performance display device 206, and as a result, the output port (which outputs the common signal) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and performance display device 206 is eliminated. There is no need to provide an output port for
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and in the main control board 200 (CPU 210), the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 It is no longer necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the two, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In test signal output processing (step S4-24), which will be described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time-saving control, etc.), and outputs the generated test signal. , and stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. The test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, a detection signal from the special map 1 starting port switch 101, a detection signal from the special chart 2 starting port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the first count switch 103a, A detection signal from the second count switch 103b, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and the test The signal is input to the interface board of the test computer via the signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, each solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid 64, first special electric accessory solenoid 65a, second special electric accessory solenoid 65b, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 A control signal for controlling the drive is input to each solenoid, and is also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be explained.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the firing of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, ROM, RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. Further, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (rental ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
Further, the payout control board 400 receives the resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, the firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and the main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from CR unit 200 and the CR connection signal input from CR unit 700, the game ball launch operation by game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method of controlling the game ball firing operation by the payout control board 400 will be explained in detail.

As shown in FIG. 6, the payout control board 400 is configured to include a firing condition detection circuit 420 and a firing control circuit 425 as a circuit for controlling the game ball putting out operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects the establishment of firing conditions, which will be described later.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection section 421, a firing condition detection section 422, and a firing condition detection section 423.
The operation detection section 421 is a circuit that detects a rotational operation (amount of rotational operation) of the handle operation section.
The operation detection unit 421 is configured to include an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal (sets the operation detection signal to a high level or a low level) according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes depending on the amount of rotational operation of the handle operating section. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), determines whether or not there is a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and whether or not the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is performed. Detect the amount and.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal while detecting the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection signal to high level). On the other hand, when the operation detection section 421 does not detect the rotational operation of the handle operation section, it stops outputting the operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection section 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a low level).
Further, while detecting the rotational operation of the handle operation unit, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal according to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411), and The intensity signal is output to the firing control circuit 425.

The firing possible condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects the establishment of firing possible conditions.
The firing enable condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a predetermined signal according to the result of the logical product of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal, and an AND gate. The device includes a transistor that switches between outputting and stopping the steering wheel detection signal in accordance with a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "fireable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among a plurality of conditions that constitute the firing condition described later.
Conditions for allowing firing include (1) conditions based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and operation detection unit 421 (detection status of rotational operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) conditions based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit by the player). (3) conditions based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of pressing operation of the firing stop button).
In this embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect a rotational operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects a contact with the handle operation unit by the player. and (3) no press operation of the firing stop button is detected by the firing stop switch 413. On the other hand, if at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the firing enable condition is not satisfied.
Here, the conditions for allowing firing include (1) conditions based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and operation detection unit 421 (detection status of rotational operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) detection status of the touch sensor 412 (player (3) conditions based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button). I don't mind.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotational operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. A configuration in which the launchable condition is satisfied when both conditions (1) and (2) are met, and the launchable condition is not satisfied when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not met. I don't mind.

Specifically, the firing enable condition detection unit 422 detects an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413. Based on this, it is detected whether or not the conditions for firing are satisfied.
At this time, the firing-enabled condition detection unit 422 detects that the firing-enabled condition is satisfied when all of the operation detection signal, touch signal, and firing stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing enable condition is not detected.
The firing possible condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the firing possible condition, and sends the generated handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423. Output (makes the handle detection signal high level). On the other hand, when the firing possible condition detection section 422 does not detect the establishment of the firing possible condition, it stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection section 423 (turns down the handle detection signal). level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition is met.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal according to the result of the AND operation of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal. Ru.
The "launch condition" is a condition for executing the firing of a game ball (game ball firing operation) into the game area 30 by the game ball firing device 430 (firing solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, (1) firing enable conditions are satisfied, (2) a firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is met when all the conditions are met. On the other hand, if at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the firing condition is not satisfied.
The "launch permission signal" indicates that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (that the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, when the game enabled state is set, the main control board 200 outputs to the firing condition detection section 423.
Here, the launch permission signal may be configured to be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 regardless of the state of the gaming machine while the main control board 200 is powered on. do not have. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the launch permission signal is sent. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the main control board 200 outputs it to the firing condition detection section 423.
The "CR connection signal" is transmitted when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection section 423.

Specifically, the firing condition detection section 423 receives a handle detection signal inputted from the firing possible condition detection section 422, a firing permission signal inputted from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal inputted from the CR unit 700. Based on , it is detected whether the firing condition is satisfied or not.
At this time, the firing condition detection unit 423 detects that the firing condition is met when all of the handle detection signal, firing permission signal, and CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing condition is not detected.
The firing condition detection unit 423 generates a firing signal while detecting the establishment of the firing condition, and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (setting the firing signal to high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detection unit 423 stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to low level) when not detecting that the firing condition is met.

The firing control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the firing strength of the game ball by the game ball firing device 430 and the firing timing of the game ball by the game ball firing device 430. That is, the firing control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball firing device 430 (firing solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generator outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the emission timing controller.
The firing timing control section generates a pulse signal for controlling firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating section, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid drive section. At this time, the firing timing control section generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit operates the firing solenoid based on the firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, the pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and the firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. Controls the output of the drive signal to 431.
Specifically, the firing solenoid drive unit receives an input from the operation detection unit 421 when a pulse signal is input from the firing timing control unit when a firing signal is input from the firing condition detection unit 423. A drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the firing intensity signal is output to the firing solenoid 431. As a result, the game ball is ejected with an intensity corresponding to the ejection intensity signal inputted from the operation detection section 421.
On the other hand, the firing solenoid drive section stops outputting the drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 when the firing signal is not input from the firing condition detection section 423 . As a result, the firing of the game balls is stopped.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a batting mallet (not shown) and a firing solenoid 431 that drives the batting mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is constituted by a rotary solenoid. Here, the batting mallet may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
Game balls are supplied to the game ball firing device 430 from a ball feeding unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the firing solenoid 431, the firing solenoid 431 is driven in accordance with the inputted driving signal, and a game ball is hit by the batting mallet. As a result, the game ball is launched into the game area 30 via the launch path r3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, on the premise that the main control board 200 is set to the playable state and the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are in a state where communication is possible, the firing is stopped. When the handle operation section is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position) by the player's touch without pressing the button, the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 is started. . Then, while the game ball firing device 430 executes the game ball firing operation, the game ball is fired toward the game area 30 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operation section.
Further, when the firing stop button is pressed down, the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 is stopped. That is, even if the handle operation section is rotated by the player's touch, when the firing stop button is pressed, the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 is stopped.
Further, when the handle operation section is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation section is not rotated), the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even if the player is in contact with the handle operation part, when the handle operation part is returned to the initial position, the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the shooting possible condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the shooting possible condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "shooting possible state"). be done.
In other words, a state is occurring in which rotation of the handle operation section is detected, contact with the handle operation section is detected, and no press operation of the firing stop button is detected (fire ready state). At this time, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the firing enable state is occurring, regardless of whether a firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). (1) The output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Furthermore, as long as the firing ready state is occurring, regardless of whether or not the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400). regardless of whether the firing condition detection circuit 420 is in the current state or not), the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
As a result of the above, the main control board 200 can detect (understand) whether or not a firing-enabled state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the performance, etc. according to the occurrence of the firing-enabled state. It becomes possible to do so.

That is, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from not being input to being input (the handle detection signal has changed from low level to high level), the main control board 200 can fire. A game situation designation command that designates the occurrence (start) of a state is transmitted to the production control board 300.
On the other hand, the main control board 200 can fire when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from being input to not being input (the handle detection signal has changed from high level to low level). A game situation designation command that designates cancellation (termination) of the state is transmitted to the production control board 300.
As a result, the production control board 300 detects the occurrence of the firing-enabled state by receiving the gaming situation designation command that designates the occurrence of the firing-enabled state, and upon receiving the gaming situation designation command that designates the release of the firing-enabled state, It becomes possible to detect release of the firing ready state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the effect content depending on whether or not a firing ready state is occurring.

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the production control board 300 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the production control board.
The production control board 300 controls production (display production, sound production, lamp production, movable body production, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 7, the production control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301 and various data necessary for executing the control program. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores (memorizes) performance scenario data corresponding to each performance number, animation data corresponding to each display performance number, various compression lamp drive data, and various compression motor drive data.
"Compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving the various lamps 20 and 21 (data specifying the brightness values of the lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
"Compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) motor drive data in a predetermined format. “Motor drive data” is data for driving various motors 23 (data that defines the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR flash memory (NOR ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
Control ROM 302 is connected to HOST interface 313 of microcomputer 301.

The CGROM 303 stores (memorizes) various types of compressed image data, various types of compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. “Image data (material data)” is data of images (moving images/still images) that are the materials for drawing processing.
"Compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. “Audio data” is data of voices (effect sounds) output from various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured with an SSD (Solid State Drive) using a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
CGROM 303 is connected to CG bus interface 314 of microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard connection interface. As a result, reading of various data stored in the CGROM 303 is performed by SATA transfer.

DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a drawing command buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and two drawing command buffer areas are provided in the DRAM 304.
The two drawing command buffer areas have the same size. While one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as a construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as a transfer area. Further, for each drawing command buffer area, designation of a construction area and designation of a transfer area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in the drawing command buffer area during the period specified as the construction area, and during the period specified as the transfer area. , the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
DRAM 304 is connected to DRAM interface 315 of microcomputer 301.

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls performance operations by various performance means based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
The "various presentation means" include the main image display device 31, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "performance operations by various production means" include display of production images by the main image display device 31, output of sounds by the various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21, various motors 23 (various movable This includes driving the body).
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a graphic The data bus 324 includes internal devices such as a bus decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, a sound circuit 323, and the like, and these internal devices are connected to a data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to a HOST interface 313 via a CPU interface 312. Further, the main control board 200 is connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands from the main control board 200 are input. Further, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
This allows the CPU 310 to receive control commands (subcommands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 is capable of communicating with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a sound circuit 323 via a HOST interface 313 and a data bus 324. .
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313, data bus 324, and CG bus interface 314.
Further, the CPU 310 can read and write data to and from the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313, data bus 324, and DRAM interface 315.

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes necessary to control the effect operations by various effect means, control processes for internal devices in accordance with the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various calculation processes, a buffer area for various calculation processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, etc. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects a performance (performance number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets performance scenario data corresponding to the selected performance number. Further, according to the selected/set performance scenario data, command information (internal commands) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound circuit 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) is sequentially generated.

Specifically, CPU 310 sets the animation table in the animation table setting area according to the command information. Then, according to the set animation table, a display list is generated in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area.
The "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, in the display list, a group of drawing commands for one frame are described in a predetermined order. Then, in the VDP, one frame of drawing data is generated by executing processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the content of drawing processing (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area where compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) of the image data, and the The coordinates at which the image data is drawn (coordinates in the frame buffer area), the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) when drawing the image data, etc. are specified.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 .
That is, while a NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily be increased in capacity compared to a NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, the data read speed is slow. For this reason, if the compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the sound circuit 323 executes audio output processing, the processing performance may deteriorate significantly.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before audio output processing is executed, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred in advance to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means with a faster data readout speed than the CGROM 303. . By configuring the compressed audio data to be read from the DRAM 304 when audio output processing is executed, deterioration in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data from among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . At this time, in this embodiment, all compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the audio output from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the main image display device 31 becomes able to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image by the main image display device 31 (drawing process by VDP).
On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by the lamp controller 317a).
Furthermore, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area. In the image development area, image data (material data) developed (restored and decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored.
Further, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and two frame buffer areas are provided in the VRAM 316.
The two frame buffer areas have the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as a drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as an output area. Further, for each frame buffer area, designation of a drawing area and designation of an output area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, one frame of drawing data is stored (generated/drawn) in the frame buffer area during the period specified as the drawing area, and during the period specified as the output area. , output of a video signal is executed based on one frame of drawing data stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, and the like function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of effect images by the main image display device 31. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and uses the generated video signal as a main image. It is output to the display device 31.
The preloader circuit 319 is capable of reading various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314.
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing circuit 322 executes drawing processing.
That is, as described above, a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but has a slower data read speed. Therefore, if the compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes drawing processing, there is a possibility that the processing performance will be significantly degraded.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred in advance to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means with a faster data readout speed than the CGROM 303. By configuring the compressed image data to be read from the DRAM 304 when drawing processing is executed, deterioration in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, the preloader circuit 319 transfers one frame of compressed image data specified by the display list out of the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Transfer (preload) to. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address specifying a storage area of the CGROM 303 is written as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, for each drawing command included in the display list, the preloader circuit 319 transfers the compressed image data stored in the storage area (the storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command to a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. After the drawing command is transferred, the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address that specifies the storage area (predetermined area of the DRAM 304) after the transfer. As a result, a new display list with rewritten image addresses is generated.
Here, in this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the preloader circuit 319 transfers compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318.

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates and draws) one frame worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, it reads one frame of compressed image data specified by the display list from the DRAM 304. One frame worth of compressed image data read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (developed) in the image development area of the VRAM 316 . Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image development area to generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on one frame of drawing data stored (generated/drawn) in a frame buffer area designated as an output area, and displays the generated video signal as a main image. Output to the device 31. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as the video signal. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a dither circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). ), etc.
The data acquisition circuit reads drawing data stored in a frame buffer area designated as an output area.
The scaler circuit is capable of performing scaling processing (enlargement processing/reduction processing) on the drawing data read out by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit is capable of performing color correction processing on the drawing data processed by the scaler circuit.
The dither circuit is capable of dithering the drawing data processed by the color correction circuit.
The drawing data processed by the dithering circuit is then output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). The synchronization signal generation circuit then outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the main image display device 31. Further, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
Here, in this embodiment, the display of the effect image on the main image display device 31 (the display of the effect image based on one frame of drawing data) is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (set to high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound circuit 323 (built-in sound source) controls the output (playback) of sounds (effect sounds) from the various speakers 22.
The sound circuit 323 includes 40 tracks (track 1 to track 40), 8 audio buses (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8), and 8 channels (channel 1 to channel 8). It is configured.
The sound circuit 323 is equipped with an independent sequencer for each track. Phrase information (information specifying compressed audio data) to be reproduced can be registered in the sequencer for each track. The sequencer can control playback, stop, volume, etc. of audio data based on registered phrase information for each track.
Each track has a compressed audio decoder that restores (decodes) compressed audio data, a track fader that controls the volume of the track, a programmable pan that outputs the audio data of the track to any audio bus, etc. It is composed of:
The eight audio buses are equipped with a switcher, ducker, and channel router that outputs audio data from each audio bus to any channel.
The eight channels include channel volume, equalizer, limiter, post-effector, master volume, audio serial output, etc. The sound data output from each channel (audio serial output) is input to the speaker 22 via an amplifier (not shown). Here, one speaker 22 is connected to each channel.
The CPU 310 registers phrase information to be reproduced in the sequencer according to the command information. Thereby, audio data is generated according to the phrase information registered in the sequencer, and the generated audio data is output to various speakers 22 via the amplifier.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21.
Specifically, the CPU 310 sets the LED register according to command information (message) set in a lamp command buffer area, which will be described later. Then, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data according to the settings of the LED register, and outputs the generated lamp drive data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 together with a clock signal. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads compression lamp drive data specified by the command information from the control ROM 302. It also restores (decodes) the read compression lamp drive data. Then, lamp drive data is generated based on the restored lamp drive data, and the generated lamp drive data is output to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, CPU 310 sets the motor register according to command information (message) set in a movable body command buffer area, which will be described later. Then, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data according to the settings of the motor register, and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with a clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads compression motor drive data specified by the command information from the control ROM 302. It also restores (decodes) the read compression motor drive data. Then, motor drive data is generated based on the restored motor drive data, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
Further, information indicating the detection status of various sensors 24 is input from the driver board 330 to the motor controller 317b, and information indicating the detection status of each switch 25 to 29 and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input from the sub-connection board 340. Information indicating the detection status of is input.

(Method of controlling production using production control board 300)
Next, a method of controlling the performance using the performance control board 300 will be explained.
The CPU 310 selects a performance (performance number) to be executed according to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the performance scenario data corresponding to the selected performance number and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "performance scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production. Specifically, a plurality of process data are registered in chronological order in the performance scenario data. That is, a plurality of process data and information specifying the start time (start timing) of processing based on each process data are registered in the performance scenario data.
Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information. For example, the command information includes command information specifying the start of a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable object effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable object effect) Command information (hereinafter referred to as "performance end command") that specifies the end of the performance is specified.

Further, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the performance based on the performance scenario data set in the performance scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the performance scenario timer set in the performance scenario setting area at a predetermined period, and updates the performance set in the performance scenario setting area based on the updated value of the performance scenario timer. It is determined whether there is any process data whose start time has arrived among the process data registered in the scenario data. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each piece of command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (command information specifying the start of the display effect, command information specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the sound production (command information specifying the start of the sound production, command information specifying the end of the sound production, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the lamp effect (command information specifying the start of the lamp effect, command information specifying the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (command information specifying the start of the movable body performance, command information specifying the end of the movable body performance, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(How to control display effects)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be explained.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). The animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (image forming the display effect).
"Display priority information" is information that specifies display priority.
“Display priority” is information that specifies display (drawing) priority.
When a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed overlappingly in time, the display on the display screen 31a (the image displayed on the display screen 31a) is based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). A staged image) is constructed. In this case, among the multiple display effects (images) that make up the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is lower than the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. , will be displayed with priority. That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is displayed with higher priority.
In other words, among the plurality of display effects (images) that make up the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is closer to the player (player) than the display effect (image) with a lower display priority. side). That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the viewer.
As a result, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the relevant effect image, there is overlap between a display effect (image) with a higher display priority and a display effect (image) with a lower display priority. If there is, the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed preferentially for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area at predetermined intervals. If it is determined that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each piece of command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302 Read out. Then, the read animation table is set (stored/registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is copied to the animation table setting area. Note that multiple animation tables can be set in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling image display) that defines the progress of display effects (display of effect images) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of an image.
Specifically, a predetermined number of pieces of frame information are registered in the animation table in chronological order. The display performance progresses by sequentially displaying images based on each piece of frame information in the order in which they are registered for a predetermined number of pieces of frame information registered in the animation table.
Each frame information is a variety of parameters for controlling (executing and configuring) the display of one frame's worth of images. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) that specifies the image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) that specifies the display priority of the image data (the display effect), and information that specifies the image data (the display effect). Information that specifies the magnification (enlargement rate/reduction rate) when drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) for rendering the image data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information") (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency rate) when drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), etc. .

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes command construction processing, which will be described later, at predetermined intervals.
In the command construction process, first, the sub-scenario timer corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area is updated. Next, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified as the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, among the frame information registered in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. Then, a display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display performance (display of the performance image by the main image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when one piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies the rendering of the image data specified by the one piece of animation data.
On the other hand, if multiple animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, specify that the image data specified by the multiple animation data be drawn in a predetermined order (sequence). A display list is constructed.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area, the order in which image data corresponding to the display priority information is rendered is set.

(How to control sound production)
Next, a method of controlling sound effects using the effect control board 300 will be explained.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at predetermined intervals. If it is determined that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each piece of command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
Here, the command information that specifies the start of the sound production includes information that specifies the compressed audio data to start playing (sound production number), information that specifies the track in which the compressed audio data is registered, etc. . If command information that specifies the start of a sound production is stored in the sound command buffer area, the command information specifies information (sound production number) that specifies the compressed audio data specified by the command information. Register to the track you want. Thereby, the generation and output of audio data is controlled according to the information registered in each track.
On the other hand, the command information specifying the stop of the sound production includes information specifying the track on which to stop the reproduction. If command information specifying the end of the sound production is stored in the sound command buffer area, reproduction of audio data is stopped for the track specified by the command information.
On the other hand, the command information specifying volume adjustment includes information specifying the track whose volume is to be adjusted, information specifying the details of the adjustment, and the like. If command information specifying volume adjustment is stored in the sound command buffer area, the volume is adjusted for the track designated by the command information according to the adjustment content specified by the designation information.

(Lamp effect control method)
Next, a method of controlling the lamp effect using the effect control board 300 will be explained.
CPU 310 determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area at predetermined intervals. If it is determined that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each piece of command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
At this time, if a performance start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the performance start command is read out, and the read compressed lamp drive data is stored in the lamp register. Set. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp performance (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(How to control moving body performance)
Next, a method of controlling the movable body performance using the performance control board 300 will be explained.
CPU 310 determines whether command information is stored in the movable object command buffer area at predetermined intervals. When it is determined that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each piece of command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
At this time, if the performance start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the compression motor drive data specified by the performance start command is read out, and the read compression motor drive data is set in the motor register. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the movable body performance (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) according to the compression motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331, a lamp driver 332, and a motor driver 333.
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system forming the panel lamp 21 according to lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a brightness value corresponding to each system configuring the panel lamp 21. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the panel lamp 21. As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 sends excitation signals (drive current) to various motors 23 (motors 23 forming various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 disposed in the game board unit 10 is specified in the motor drive data. Then, each motor 23 is supplied with an excitation signal (drive current) according to the output value specified by the motor drive data. As a result, the drive of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 . Then, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 341, a lamp driver 342, and a motor driver 343.
The lamp driver 342 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system forming the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies brightness values corresponding to each system making up the frame lamp 20. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20. As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 sends excitation signals (drive current) to various motors 23 (motors 23 forming various movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 according to motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 disposed in the integrated door unit 4 is specified in the motor drive data. Then, each motor 23 is supplied with an excitation signal (drive current) according to the output value specified by the motor drive data. As a result, the drive of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from the various sensors 24 and detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 341. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data, and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(About gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states are defined as gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state). .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine status flag area. The gaming machine status flag area contains six gaming machine statuses (specifically, game ready status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting abnormality status, RAM abnormality status, and backup abnormality status) as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to proceed with the game.
While the game-enabled state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted. This allows the games (normal games and special games) to proceed.
Further, while the game-enabled state is occurring, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, information regarding the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The “setting change state” is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state is generated when the setting change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 207 is input. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, by pressing down the RAM clear switch 207, it becomes possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area. Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, a game enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the setting value stored in the setting value area is determined.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 207 is input. The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Further, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, a game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the game enabled state is occurring.
While the setting abnormality is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Furthermore, while a setting abnormality is occurring, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from an abnormal setting state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to bring about a setting change state.

The "RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
While the RAM abnormal state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Furthermore, while the RAM abnormality is occurring, an error code specifying the occurrence of the RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
While the backup abnormal state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Further, while a backup abnormality is occurring, an error code specifying the occurrence of the backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to bring about a setting change state.

(About setting values)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) (probability of winning the "jackpot"). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set value.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one value from "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "big hit" through the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) changes according to the value (set value) set in the set value area. (Change.
On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is fixed (constant) regardless of the value (setting value) set in the setting value area. It becomes. In other words, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) does not fluctuate (change) depending on the value (set value) set in the set value area. .

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting values stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the setting value is changed by an administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the settings A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, a game enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the setting value stored in the setting value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the game-enabled state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined gaming state is occurring (specifically, while time saving control is stopped).
Then, while the playable state is occurring, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired into the game area 30 and the predetermined ball entrance openings (in this embodiment, the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, the other right winning opening 59, and This information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering the left winning holes 57a to 57d). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of pitches put out to the number of out pitches.
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined section (period) is calculated. Then, as the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60,000 [balls]) of out balls are detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts in response to the end of the previous section, and ends in response to the number of out pitches detected during the current section reaching a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio every predetermined time.
"Number of out pitches" refers to the number of out pitches. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
Note that the game ball ejected from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball ejected from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as an out ball.
The "number of payouts" is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 51, second starting hole 52, right other winning hole 59, and left other winning holes 57a to 57d. Refers to the total.

(About time saving control)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, compared to when the time saving control is stopped, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52, which is advantageous for the player. In particular, during the execution of the time saving control, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 compared to when the time saving control is stopped, and as a result, the conditions under which the special figure 2 game information is acquired are It becomes easier to establish.
Specifically, while the time saving control is being executed, compared to when the time saving control is stopped, the time for displaying the fluctuating symbols is shortened. In addition, while the time saving control is being executed, compared to when the time saving control is stopped, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state which will be described later. In other words, the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state becomes longer.Or the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened increases).
Note that the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (probability that a "normal symbol hit" is determined by the normal symbol win/loss determination) is fixed regardless of the gaming state. That is, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (probability that a "normal symbol hit" is determined by the normal symbol win/loss determination) is the same during execution of the time saving control and while the time saving control is stopped.

(Normal design lottery)
Next, the normal symbol lottery executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate 41.
In this embodiment, "normal pattern hit" and "miss" are defined as the results of the normal pattern lottery.
The probability of determining a "normal pattern hit" (winning) by the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning/losing determination) is 99/100, regardless of whether time saving control is being executed or stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning type (type of symbol per common symbol) that is selected when a "symbol per common symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery is "1 symbol per common symbol"("symbol 1 per common symbol"). ) are stipulated.
If you win "1 per ordinary symbol", after the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol is executed on the ordinary symbol display device, the stop symbol (display mode of the ordinary symbol) corresponding to "1 symbol per ordinary symbol" is displayed. Stop display.
On the other hand, if you are unsuccessful in the normal symbol lottery (in the case of a "miss"), after the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the common symbol display device, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" (display of the normal symbol) is executed. mode) is stopped and displayed.
In this embodiment, when the start determination is executed while the time saving control is stopped, 10.0 [s] is selected and set as the time (variation time) for the variable display of the normal symbol based on the start determination. On the other hand, when the start determination is executed during execution of the time saving control, 1.0 [s] is selected and set as the time (variation time) of the variable display of the normal symbol based on the start determination.

In the case of winning "1 per normal symbol", the normal symbol per game state is generated after the fluctuating display and the stop display of the normal symbols are finished. In the normal figure winning game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the normal figure game state, the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is executed based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern. At this time, if the start determination is executed while the time-saving control is stopped, the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is executed based on the first ordinary electric opening/closing pattern. On the other hand, when the start determination is executed during execution of the time-saving control, the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is executed based on the second ordinary electric opening/closing pattern.
In the first general electric opening/closing pattern, 2 [times] is set as the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened (displaced from the closed state to the open state), and the duration of opening each time (the open state is maintained The time (in this embodiment, 0.1 [s]) at which it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 is set as the time). As a result, when the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a based on the first ordinary electric opening/closing pattern is executed, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is prevented during the occurrence of the ordinary figure winning game state. It becomes impossible (difficult).

In the second normal power opening/closing pattern, 2 [times] is set as the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened (displaced from the closed state to the open state), and the duration of opening each time (the open state is maintained The time (in this embodiment, 2.9 [s]) during which it is possible (easily) for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 is set as the time. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a based on the second ordinary electric opening/closing pattern is executed, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is prevented during the occurrence of the ordinary figure winning game state. It becomes possible (easy).
The opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is performed when (1) the opening/closing control (opening/closing operation) of the ordinary electric accessory 52a based on a predetermined ordinary electric opening/closing pattern (the first ordinary electric opening/closing pattern or the second ordinary electric opening/closing pattern) is completed; (2) The number of game balls that entered the second starting port 52 during the opening/closing control reached a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]). The process is terminated when the following conditions are met.

(Special design lottery)
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the probability of winning the special symbol lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the selection probability of jackpot symbols. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the selection probability of small winning symbols.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 51, a first special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 52, a second special symbol is drawn. A lottery will be held.
In this embodiment, "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. Further, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, a "big hit", a "small hit", and a "miss" are defined.
It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a "small hit" is not specified as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which "missing" is not defined as a result of the second special symbol lottery.
In the following explanation, the probability of winning a "jackpot" by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) will be referred to as "jackpot probability." In addition, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is referred to as "small win probability."

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery are the same. In particular, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is a probability according to the value (set value) set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities corresponding to each set value are, in descending order of winning probability, the jackpot probability corresponding to the setting value = "5", the jackpot probability corresponding to the setting value = "4", and the jackpot probability corresponding to the setting value = "4". Jackpot probability corresponding to "3", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "2", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "1", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "0" (winning probability "high") → The probability of winning is “low”).
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the set value is "0", the jackpot probability is 1/319.6. On the other hand, when the set value = "1", the jackpot probability = 1/291.2. On the other hand, when the set value = "2", the jackpot probability = 1/262.1. On the other hand, when the set value = "3", the jackpot probability = 1/242.7. On the other hand, when the set value = "4", the jackpot probability = 1/225.9. On the other hand, when the set value = "5", the jackpot probability = 1/204.8.

On the other hand, the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are different. At this time, the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is higher than the small win probability of the first special symbol lottery. Note that the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are each fixed (constant) regardless of the set value.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery is 1/362.0. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is 1/1.1.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in this embodiment, “Jackpot 1” ( ``Jackpot symbol 1'') and ``Jackpot 2'' (``Jackpot symbol 2'') are defined.
When a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability that "jackpot 1"("jackpot symbol 1") will be selected is 25%, and "jackpot 2"("jackpot symbol The probability that ``2'') is selected is 75%.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when a "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery, the winning type ("jackpot symbol" type) is "Jackpot 3"("Jackpot symbol 3"). ”) and “Jackpot 4” (“Jackpot Symbol 4”) are defined.
Then, when a "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "jackpot 3"("jackpot symbol 3") will be selected is 10%, and "jackpot 4"("jackpot symbol 4) is selected at a probability of 90%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when a "small win" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the winning type ("small win symbol" type) selected is "small win 1" ( "Small winning pattern 1") and "Small winning pattern 2"("Small winning pattern 2") are defined.
When a "small win" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability that "small win 1"("small win symbol 1") will be selected is 78%, and "small win 2" is selected. ” (“Small winning symbol 2”) is selected at a probability of 22%.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(b), when a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery, "small win 3" ( ``Small winning pattern 3'') and ``Small winning pattern 4'' (``Small winning pattern 4'') are defined.
When a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "small win 3"("small win symbol 3") will be selected is 10%, and "small win 4" is selected. The probability that (“Small winning symbol 4”) will be selected is 90%.

If you win "Jackpot 1", the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 1 display device, and then the stop symbol (special symbol display mode) corresponding to "jackpot symbol 1" will be stopped and displayed. Ru. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "REG symbol" are stopped and displayed.
The "REG symbol" is, for example, the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is the same even number such as "6, 6, 6". The display mode is such that the second performance symbols z2, which are arranged in "numeric symbols" indicating , and which are stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4, show a predetermined color.
If you win "Jackpot 2", after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 1 display device, the stop symbol (special symbol display mode) corresponding to "jackpot symbol 2" is stopped and displayed. Ru. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.
"BIG symbol" means that, for example, the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same odd number, such as "7, 7, 7". The display mode is such that the second performance symbols z2, which are arranged in "numeric symbols" indicating , and which are stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4, show a predetermined color.

If you win "Jackpot 3", after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 2 display device, the stop symbol (special symbol display mode) corresponding to "jackpot symbol 3" is stopped and displayed. Ru. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.
If you win "Jackpot 4", after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 2 display device, the stop symbol (special symbol display mode) corresponding to "jackpot symbol 4" is stopped and displayed. Ru. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.

If you win "Small win 1", the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 1 display device, and then the stop symbol (display mode of the special symbol) corresponding to "Small symbol 1" stops. Is displayed. Furthermore, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "REG symbol" are stopped and displayed.
If you win "Small hit 2", the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 1 display device, and then the stop symbol (display mode of the special symbol) corresponding to "Small symbol 2" stops. Is displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.

If you win "Small win 3", the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 2 display device, and then the stop symbol (display mode of the special symbol) corresponding to "Small symbol 3" stops. Is displayed. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.
If you win "Small hit 4", the special symbol 2 display device displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and then the stop symbol (display mode of the special symbol) corresponding to "Small win symbol 4" stops. Is displayed. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stopped and displayed.

If you are unsuccessful in the first special symbol lottery (in the case of a "miss"), after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 1 display device, the stop symbol corresponding to the "miss" symbol (the special symbol display mode) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.
A "missing symbol" means, for example, that at least one of the first performance symbols z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, The combination is such that identification information different from the first performance symbol z1 is displayed, and the second performance symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4 is a display mode in which the second performance symbol z2 shows a predetermined color.
If you are unsuccessful in the second special symbol lottery (in the case of a "miss"), after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol 2 display device, the stop symbol corresponding to the "miss" symbol (the special symbol display mode) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.

If you win "Jackpot 1"("Jackpot Symbol 1") to "Jackpot 4"("Jackpot Symbol 4"), a jackpot gaming state will occur after the special symbol fluctuation display and stop display are executed. Ru. During the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the first special electric accessory 55b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the first jackpot opening 55a.
Specifically, while the jackpot game state is occurring, a predetermined number of round games are executed.
In this embodiment, when winning "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 4", 5 [times] is set as the number of round games.
And, during the period from the start to the end of each round game, the open state of the first special electric accessory 55b is always maintained (long open). That is, according to the start of each round game, the first special electric accessory 55b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and according to the end of the round game, the first special electric accessory 55b is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Displaced into a state.
When winning "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 4", a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the longest opening time of the first special electric accessory 55b in each round game. Ru.
In each round game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the first special electric accessory 55b was set to the open state, and (2) the player entered the first big prize opening 55a during the execution of the round game. The game ends when any one of the conditions is met when the number of entered game balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).

If you win "Small win 1"("Small win pattern 1") to "Small win 4"("Small win pattern 4"), after the special symbol fluctuation display and stop display are executed, the small win will be announced. A gaming state is generated. During the occurrence of the small winning game state, the second special electric accessory 56b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the second big prize opening 56a.
Specifically, while the small winning game state is occurring, the small winning game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this embodiment, when winning "small win 1" to "small win 4", 1 [time] is set as the number of small win games.
During each small winning game, the distributing means 56c is displaced (displaced to the V-passing state or the non-V-passing state) based on a predetermined distributing pattern, and based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern, Opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed.
In this embodiment, one distribution pattern (hereinafter referred to as "specific distribution pattern") is defined as the distribution pattern of the distribution means 56c in the small winning game. When "small win 1" to "small win 4" is won, the allocating means 56c is displaced according to the specific allocation pattern in each small win game.
Moreover, one opening/closing pattern (hereinafter referred to as "specific opening/closing pattern") is defined as the opening/closing pattern of the second special electric accessory 56b in the small winning game. Then, when winning "Small win 1" to "Small win 4", the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed according to a specific opening/closing pattern in each small win game.

In the specific opening/closing pattern, the short opening of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed multiple times.
"Short release" is release based on the short release time.
"Short opening time" is a time (for example, 0.1 to 0.5 [s] shorter than the longest opening time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s]) of the second special electric accessory 56b in each round game. s]).
That is, in the specific opening/closing pattern, a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 10 [times]) is set as the number of times the second special electric accessory 56b is short-circuited (displaced from the closed state to the open state). In addition, a short-circuit opening time is set as the duration of each short-circuit opening (time during which the open state is maintained). Furthermore, after each short-circuit opening, the second special electric accessory 56b is kept closed (closed state) for a predetermined period of time.
In particular, in the specific opening/closing pattern, in relation to the specific distribution pattern, a mode (pattern) is adopted in which it is easy (possible) for the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 56a to pass through the V area during the small winning game. , multiple short releases are performed. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed based on the specific opening/closing pattern, it is easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. becomes.

Each round of the small winning game requires (1) completion of the opening/closing control (opening/closing operation) of the second special electric accessory 56b based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern (in this embodiment, a specific opening/closing pattern); and (2) The number of game balls that entered the second big prize opening 56a during the execution of the small winning game has reached a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and one of the conditions is met. be terminated accordingly.
When passing through the V area by a game ball is detected during the occurrence of a small winning game state (when passing through the V area by a game ball that enters the second big prize opening 56a during execution of a small winning game) ), a jackpot gaming state is generated in response to the end of the small winning gaming state (following the small winning gaming state).
At this time, if "Small win 1" to "Small win 4" is won, 5 [times] is set as the number of round games.
As a result, if "Small win 1" to "Small win 4" are won, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win game state is occurring, the total number of rounds will be 6 [times]. becomes.
Here, the "total number of rounds" is the total number of rounds (small win games or round games) executed during the occurrence of the small win game state and during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In addition, if you win "Small win 1" to "Small win 4", the longest open time of the second special electric accessory 56b in each round game is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s]). ) is set.
On the other hand, if the passage of the V area by the game ball is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring (passing of the V area by the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 56a during the execution of the small winning game is detected) If the small winning gaming state is not executed), the jackpot gaming state is not generated after the small winning gaming state ends (following the small winning gaming state).

In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, when "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 4" are won, the second special electric accessory 56b is activated by the specific opening/closing pattern in each small winning game. It is opened and closed. This makes it easy (possible) for all the "small winning symbols"("small winning symbols 1" to "small winning symbols 4") to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. ) is the "small winning pattern".
However, the type of small winning symbol is one that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "small winning (with V)"). and a type in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of a small winning gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "small winning (no V)"). I don't mind.
That is, the specific opening/closing pattern and the non-specific opening/closing pattern are defined as the opening/closing pattern of the second special electric accessory 56b in the small winning game.
In the non-specific opening/closing pattern, in relation to the specific distribution pattern, a mode (pattern ), the short circuit is opened multiple times. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed based on the non-specific opening/closing pattern, it is easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state. ).
When a "small win (with V)" is won, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed according to a specific opening/closing pattern in each small win game. As a result, when a "small win (with V)" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small win game state is occurring.
On the other hand, if a "small win (no V)" is won, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed according to a non-specific opening/closing pattern in each small win game. As a result, when a "small win (no V)" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small win game state is occurring.

At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state at the time of execution of the start determination (during time saving control or stopped) and the type of winning symbol ("Jackpot symbol 1" to "Jackpot symbol 4" or "Small winning symbol 1") - "Small winning symbol 4"), a predetermined number of time reductions (a first number of time reductions and a second number of time reductions to be described later) are set.
In this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions (specifically, "time-saving termination condition 1" to "time-saving termination condition 3") are specified as termination conditions for time-saving control (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving termination conditions"). has been done.

"Time-saving termination condition 1" is a time-saving termination condition based on the total number of times of the special figure 1 variable game and the number of special figure 2 variable games.
"Special figure 1 variable game" is a variable display of the first special symbol (a variable display of the first special symbol according to the result of start determination based on the special figure 1 game information). Note that the "special symbol 1 variable game" may be used as a notification display (variable display and stop display) of the first special symbol.
"Special Figure 2 Variable Game" is a variable display of the second special symbol (a variable display of the second special symbol according to the result of start determination based on the special symbol 2 game information). In addition, the "special symbol 2 variable game" may be used as a notification display (variable display and stop display) of the second special symbol.
In this embodiment, the total number of times of the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game executed during the time saving control (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of changes in the special figure during time saving") is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When the first time saving number is reached, "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied.
Then, when the "time-saving end condition 1" is satisfied, the time-saving control is executed at the end of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game) that triggered the establishment of the time-saving end condition. be terminated.
In other words, when "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied, at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (of the variable time). time saving control is terminated at the end of the time period).
The main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the total number of changes in the special figure during time-saving. At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the first time-saving counter as the gaming state at the time of execution of the start determination (during execution of time-saving control or stopping) and the type of winning symbol ("jackpot symbol 1" to " A first time saving number is set according to the combination of "Jackpot symbol 4" or "Small prize symbol 1" to "Small prize symbol 4"). Further, each time the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is finished, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the first time saving counter being decremented to "0", it is assumed that "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied, and the time saving control is stopped.

"Time-saving termination condition 2" is a time-saving termination condition based on the special figure 2 variable game.
In this embodiment, the number of times of the special figure 2 variable game executed during the time saving control (hereinafter referred to as the "time saving medium special figure 2 variable number of times") is equal to the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state. By reaching this point, "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied.
Then, when the "time-saving termination condition 2" is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the special figure 2 variable game that triggered the establishment of the time-saving termination condition.
In other words, when the "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied, the time saving control ends at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (when the variable time elapses). be done.
The main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special figure 2 changes during time-saving. At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the CPU 210 inputs the gaming state at the time of execution of the start determination (while the time saving control is being executed or stopped) and the type of the winning symbol ("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 1" to " A second time saving number is set according to the combination of "Jackpot symbol 4" or "Small prize symbol 1" to "Small prize symbol 4"). Further, each time the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the second time saving counter being decremented to "0", it is assumed that "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied, and the time saving control is stopped.

"Time-saving termination condition 3" is a time-saving termination condition based on the occurrence (start) of a jackpot gaming state.
In the present embodiment, the "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied by the occurrence (start) of the jackpot gaming state.
Then, when "time saving termination condition 3" is satisfied, when the stop display of the "jackpot symbol" ends (when the stop time (determined time) has elapsed), or when the small winning game ends (small winning game state The time saving control is ended only when the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the game ball.

Note that the time-saving end condition may include a condition based on the number of times the "small win" is won (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving end condition 4").
That is, when the number of times that a "small win" is won during the time saving control reaches the third time saving number set at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the "time saving end condition 4" is satisfied and the time saving control is ended. A configuration may also be used.
For example, the time saving control may be configured to end when the time saving medium/small winning variation number reaches the third time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, and the "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied.
Here, the "time saving medium/small winning variation number of times" is the number of small winning variation games executed during the time saving control. "Small hit variable game" is a variable game (special symbol 1 variable game or special symbol 2 variable) that is executed when a "small hit" is won in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). games).
With this configuration, when the "time-saving end condition 4" is satisfied, at the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the "small hit" that triggered the establishment of the time-saving end condition (when the variable time has elapsed). , the time saving control is ended.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), if "Jackpot 1"("Jackpot Symbol 1") is won, the jackpot gaming state ends regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of executing the start determination. Sometimes, 0 [times] is set as the first number of time reductions, and 0 [times] is set as the second number of time reductions.
On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot 2"("Jackpot Symbol 2"), regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of executing the start determination, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as the first time saving number, 14 [times] is set, and 10 [times] is set as the second time saving number.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), if "Jackpot 3"("Jackpot Symbol 3") is won, regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of executing the start determination, the jackpot gaming state At the end of , 14 [times] is set as the first number of time reductions, and 10 [times] is set as the second number of time reductions.
On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot 4"("Jackpot Symbol 4"), the first time saving number is set to 0 [times] or 14 [times], and the second time saving number is set to 0 [times] or 14 [times]. 10 [times] is set. At this time, if the gaming state at the time of executing the start determination is the normal state, 0 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 0 [times] is set as the second time saving number. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of executing the start determination is the time saving state, the first time saving number is set to 14 [times], and the second time saving number is set to 10 [times].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when "Small win 1"("Small win symbol 1") is won, and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win gaming state is occurring. In this case, regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of executing the start determination, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, 0 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and as the second time saving number, 0 [times] is set.
On the other hand, if "Small win 2"("Small win pattern 2") is won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the game state at the time of execution of the start determination Regardless of the state (normal state or time saving state), at the end of the jackpot game state, 14 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 10 [times] is set as the second time saving number.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(b), when "Small win 3"("Small win pattern 3") is won, and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win gaming state is occurring. In this case, regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of executing the start determination, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, 14 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 14 [times] is set as the second time saving number. 10 [times] is set.
On the other hand, if "Small win 4"("Small win pattern 4") is won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win game state is occurring, the first time saving number is 0 [ [times] or 14 [times] is set, and 0 [times] or 10 [times] is set as the second time saving number of times. At this time, if the gaming state at the time of executing the start determination is the normal state, 0 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 0 [times] is set as the second time saving number. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of executing the start determination is the time saving state, the first time saving number is set to 14 [times], and the second time saving number is set to 10 [times].
In addition, if you win "Small win 1"("Small win pattern 1") to "Small win 4"("Small win pattern 4") and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win gaming state is occurring. If this is not detected, a jackpot gaming state will not occur, so the new number of time reductions (the first number of time reductions and the second number of time reductions) will not be set. Therefore, the gaming state (and the number of time reductions) at the start of the small winning gaming state continues even after the small winning gaming state ends.

Then, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, if both the value of the first time saving counter (first time saving number) and the value of the second time saving counter (second time saving number) are set to 0 [times], Time saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "normal state".
On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game state, a value of 1 [times] or more is set for at least one of the value of the first time saving counter (first time saving number) and the value of the second time saving counter (second time saving number) If so, time saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a "time saving state".
The time-saving control ("time-saving state") is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and (1) the total number of times of time-saving medium special symbol fluctuations has reached the first time-saving number set at the end of the jackpot gaming state ( "Time saving end condition 1"), (2) the number of changes in the time saving medium special figure 2 has reached the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot gaming state ("time saving ending condition 2"), and (3) The jackpot game state is terminated in response to the establishment of any of the time-saving termination conditions among the occurrences (“time-saving termination condition 3”).

(About the limiter function)
Next, the limiter function of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a limiter function.
The "limiter function" is a function that limits the number of consecutive times that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is controlled to be a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving grant control"). In other words, the limiter function is a function that limits the number of consecutive time-saving granting controls without intervening control to change the gaming state to the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving non-granting control"). It becomes.
In this embodiment, the limiter function allows the time saving control to be executed continuously up to two times.
Specifically, the main control board 200 includes a limiter counter that counts the number of consecutive times of time saving control. At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the CPU 210 sets a predetermined value as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) according to the combination of the gaming state at the time of executing the start determination and the type of winning symbol. After setting the number of time reductions (first number of time reductions and second number of time reductions), it is determined whether the count value of the limiter counter has reached a predetermined limit value (in this embodiment, 2 [times]).
If it is determined that the count value of the limiter counter has reached a predetermined limit value, the limiter function is activated and the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter) is set to 0 [times]. ] and clear the count value of the limiter counter (set 0 [times] as the count value of the limiter counter).
As a result, when the limiter function is activated, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the normal state, even though the conditions for making the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state become the time-saving state are met. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the limiter counter has not reached the predetermined limit value, the limiter function is not activated and the value set in each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter and second time-saving counter) is maintain. When at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to a value of 1 [times] or more (when time saving control is executed), the count value of the limiter counter is set to Add 1 [times]. On the other hand, when both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter are set to 0 [times] (when time saving control is not executed), the count value of the limiter counter is not added.
As a result, when the limiter function does not operate, if the conditions for making the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state become the time saving state, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the time saving state, and the jackpot gaming state ends. If the conditions for making the subsequent gaming state a time-saving state are not met, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a normal state.

(About changes in the time saving grant rate according to the setting value)
Next, changes in the time saving grant rate according to the set value will be explained.
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing changes in the BIG bonus ratio according to the set value.
In the pachinko machine 1, the total time saving grant rate fluctuates (changes) according to the value (set value) set in the set value area.
The "total time-saving award rate" is the time-saving award rate when either the "big hit" or the "small win" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total time-saving award rate is the time-saving award rate when winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total time-saving award rate is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding the "miss" times, the "big hit" time and the "small hit" time. This is a time-saving grant rate.
The "time saving grant rate" is based on the winning type ("small hit"("small winning pattern") type, "big hit"("jackpotpattern") type) for which it is possible (easily) to cause a time saving state. This is the probability of winning. In other words, the time saving grant rate is the winning type (type of "small hit"("small winning symbol") and type of "big hit"("jackpotsymbol")) for which it is possible (easily) to start time saving control. The probability of winning is . In other words, the time saving grant rate is based on the winning type ("small hit"("small winning pattern") type and "jackpot"("jackpotpattern") type for which the time saving state (time saving control) is expected to be given. ) is the probability of winning.
In this embodiment, for the first special symbol lottery, the total time saving grant rate (time saving grant rate at the time of winning) fluctuates (changes) according to the setting value, and for the second special symbol lottery, the total time saving grant rate (time saving grant rate at the time of winning) fluctuates (changes) according to the setting value. The time saving grant rate) does not fluctuate (change) depending on the set value.

That is, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery fluctuates (changes) according to the set value. On the other hand, regarding the first special symbol lottery, each of the small winning probability, the jackpot time saving grant rate, and the small winning time saving grant rate does not fluctuate (change) depending on the set value. In particular, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot time saving grant rate and the small hit time saving grant rate are different.
With this configuration, for the first special symbol lottery, as a result of the jackpot probability varying according to the set value, the total winning probability and the total time saving award rate each fluctuate (change). That is, for the first special symbol lottery, as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, it becomes possible to fluctuate (change) each of the total winning probability and the total time saving award rate.
The "jackpot probability" is the probability of winning a "jackpot" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).
The "small hit probability" is the probability of winning a "small win" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).

The "jackpot time saving award rate" is the time saving award rate when a "jackpot" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the jackpot time and time saving grant rate is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) at the time of "big hit" excluding "miss" time and "small hit". This is a time-saving grant rate.
"Small hit time saving grant rate" is the time saving grant rate when a "small hit" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the small hit time saving rate is the result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), excluding the "miss" times and the "big hit times", and the "small hit" time. The time-saving grant rate is as follows.
The "total winning probability" is the probability of winning either a "big hit" or a "small win" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total winning probability is the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total winning probability is the probability of winning other results excluding "missing" (failed) among the results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). .

In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the larger the set value is, the higher the probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery becomes. Further, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot time and time saving grant rate is higher than the small hit time and time saver grant rate of the special symbol lottery.
With this configuration, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total time saving award rate can be. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total time saving award rate can be made.
This will be explained in detail below.

In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, if the jackpot probability is "A", the small win probability is "C", and the total winning probability is "E", the total winning probability "E" is calculated by the following (Formula 1). be done.
E=A+C...(Formula 1)
As shown in FIG. 9(a), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability (A) of the first special symbol lottery varies according to the set value within the range of 1/319.9 to 1/204.8. (Change. On the other hand, the small hit probability (C) of the first special symbol lottery is fixed at 1/362.0 regardless of the setting value.
As a result, if the setting value = "0", the total winning probability of the first special symbol lottery (E) = (1/319.6) + (1/362.0) = 1/169.7 .
On the other hand, when the set value = "1", the total winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/291.2) + (1/362.0) = 1/161.4.
On the other hand, when the set value = "2", the total winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/262.1) + (1/362.0) = 1/152.0.
On the other hand, when the set value = "3", the total winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/242.7) + (1/362.0) = 1/145.3.
On the other hand, when the set value = "4", the total winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/225.9) + (1/362.0) = 1/139.1.
On the other hand, when the set value = "5", the total winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/204.8) + (1/362.0) = 1/130.8.
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total winning probability (E) becomes. In other words, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total winning probability (E).

In addition, for the first special symbol lottery, the reciprocal of the jackpot probability is "a", the jackpot time saving grant rate is "B", the reciprocal of the small hit probability is "c", the small hit time saving grant rate is "D", and the composite If the time saving grant rate is "F", the combined time saving grant rate "F" is calculated by the following (Formula 2).
F=(c/(a+c))×B+(a/(a+c))×D (Formula 2)
As shown in FIG. 10(a), when a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery, among "jackpot 1"("jackpot symbol 1") and "jackpot 2"("jackpot symbol 2"), One of the winning types (the type of "jackpot symbol") is selected. At this time, "Jackpot 1" is selected with a probability of 25[%], and "Jackpot 2" is selected with a probability of 75[%].
Here, if "Jackpot 1" is won, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the normal state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of start determination. Therefore, "Jackpot 1" is a winning type in which it is impossible (difficult) to cause a time saving state.
On the other hand, if "Jackpot 2" is won, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the time saving state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of start determination. Therefore, "Jackpot 2" is a winning type in which it is possible (easily) to cause a time saving state.
As a result, the jackpot time saving grant rate (B) of the first special symbol lottery is 75/100 (75 [%]) regardless of the setting value. In particular, in this embodiment, when a "big hit" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability that a time-saving state will be given is higher than the probability that a time-saving state will not be given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when a "small win" is won in the first special symbol lottery, "small win 1"("small win symbol 1") and "jackpot 2"("jackpot symbol 2") are won. ”), one of the winning types (the type of “small winning symbol”) is selected. At this time, "small win 1" is selected with a probability of 78[%], and "small win 2" is selected with a probability of 22[%].
Here, "small win 1" is a winning type that makes it easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. If "Small win 1" is won and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win gaming state is occurring, regardless of the gaming state at the time of start determination, after the jackpot gaming state ends, The gaming state becomes the normal state. Therefore, "small win 1" is a winning type in which it is impossible (difficult) to cause a time saving state.
On the other hand, "Small win 2" is a winning type that makes it easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. If you win "Small hit 2" and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win gaming state is occurring, regardless of the gaming state at the time of start determination, after the jackpot gaming state ends, The gaming state becomes a time saving state. Therefore, "Small win 2" is a winning type in which it is possible (easily) to cause a time saving state.
As a result, the small hit time saving grant rate (D) of the first special symbol lottery is 22/100 (22 [%]) regardless of the set value. In particular, in this embodiment, when a "small win" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability that the time saving state will not be provided is higher than the probability that the time saving state will be provided.

As described above, when the setting value = "0", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(319.6+362.0)) x (75/100) + (319.6 /(319.6+362.0))×(22/100)=50.1[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "1", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(291.2+362.0)) x (75/100) + (291.2/ (291.2+362.0))×(22/100)=51.4[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "2", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(262.1+362.0)) x (75/100) + (262.1/ (262.1+362.0))×(22/100)=52.7[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "3", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(242.7+362.0)) x (75/100) + (242.7/ (242.7+362.0))×(22/100)=53.7[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "4", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(225.9+362.0)) x (75/100) + (225.9/ (225.9+362.0))×(22/100)=54.6[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "5", the composite time saving grant rate (F) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(204.8+362.0)) x (75/100) + (204.8/ (204.8+362.0))×(22/100)=55.9[%].
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total time saving grant rate (F) becomes. In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value is (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total time saving grant rate (F) becomes.
Therefore, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the expectation level (expected value/possibility) of being given a time-saving state at the time of winning. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the expectation level (expected value/probability) of being given a time-saving state at the time of winning.
In particular, in this embodiment, for the first special symbol lottery, although the small winning time saving rate is set to be less than 50% (specifically, 22%), the set value is , No matter which value is set from "0" to "5", the total time saving grant rate is 50 [%] or more (particularly more than 50 [%]). It has become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, for the first special symbol drawing, as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, each of the BIG bonus probability, REG bonus probability, total bonus probability, and BIG bonus ratio It becomes possible to fluctuate (change).
In particular, as shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 1, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the greater the BIG bonus probability, REG bonus probability, total bonus probability, and It becomes possible to increase each BIG bonus ratio. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower each of the BIG bonus probability, REG bonus probability, total bonus probability, and BIG bonus ratio can be made. It becomes possible.

"BIG Bonus" is a winning type (" Among the types of ``Jackpot'' (``Jackpot Symbol'') and ``Small Win'' (``Small Win Symbol''), this is the winning type that can (easily) cause a time-saving state. In other words, the "BIG bonus" is a winning that is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either a "big hit" or a "small win"). Among the types (types of "jackpot" ("jackpot symbol") and "small win" ("small prize symbol")), it is a winning type that makes it possible (easily) to start time-saving control. . In other words, the "BIG bonus" is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big hit" or "small win" is won). Among the winning types (types of "jackpot" ("jackpot symbol") and "small win" ("small win symbol")), the winning type is expected to be given a time-saving state (time-saving control). There is.

In this embodiment, among the winning types of the first special symbol lottery, "Jackpot 2"("Jackpot Symbol 2") and "Small Win 2"("Small Win Symbol 2") are "BIG Bonus".
"REG Bonus" is a winning type (" Among the types of "jackpot"("jackpotsymbol") and "small win"("small win symbol") type), it is a winning type in which it is impossible (difficult) to cause a time-saving state. In other words, the "REG bonus" is a winning that is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big hit" or "small win" is won). Among the winning types (types of "jackpot"("jackpotsymbol") and "small win"("small prize symbol")), it is impossible (difficult) to start time-saving control. There is. In other words, the "REG bonus" is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big hit" or "small win" is won). Among the winning types (types of "jackpot"("jackpotsymbol") and "small win"("small winning symbol")), the winning type is not expected to be given a time-saving state (time-saving control). There is.
In this embodiment, among the winning types of the first special symbol lottery, "Jackpot 1"("Jackpot symbol 1") and "Small win 1"("Small win symbol 1") are "REG bonus".

The "BIG bonus probability" is the probability of winning the "BIG bonus" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the BIG bonus probability is calculated based on all the results ("big hit", "small hit", and "miss") of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). The probability of winning the "BIG Bonus" is set.
The "REG bonus probability" is the probability of winning the "REG bonus" by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the REG bonus probability is calculated based on all the results ("big hit", "small hit", and "miss") of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). The probability of winning the ``REG Bonus.''
The "total bonus probability" is the probability of winning either the "BIG bonus" or the "REG bonus" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total bonus probability is the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total bonus probability is the probability of winning other results (bonuses) of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) excluding "missing" (failed). It has become. Here, the total bonus probability is the same as the above-mentioned total winning probability.
"BIG bonus ratio" is the probability that "BIG bonus" will be selected when either "big hit" or "small hit" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). (percentage). In other words, the BIG bonus ratio is the probability (ratio) of selecting the "BIG bonus" when winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the BIG bonus percentage is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding the "miss" times, the "big hit" time and the "small hit" time. This is the probability (ratio) that "BIG bonus" will be selected. Here, the BIG bonus rate is the same as the above-mentioned composite time saving grant rate.
This will be explained in detail below.

That is, for the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot probability is "A", the jackpot time saving grant rate is "B", the small hit probability is "C", the small winning time saving grant rate is "D", and the BIG bonus probability is "G", the BIG bonus probability "G" is calculated by the following (Formula 3).
G=(A×B)+(C×D)...(Formula 3)
As a result, if the setting value = "0", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/319.6) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x ( 22/100)=1/338.6.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "1", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/291.2) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x (22/100 )=1/314.2.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "2", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/262.1) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x (22/100 )=1/288.3.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "3", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/242.7) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x (22/100 )=1/270.5.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "4", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/225.9) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x (22/100 )=1/254.7.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "5", the BIG bonus probability (G) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/204.8) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x (22/100 )=1/234.2.
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the BIG bonus probability (G). In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the BIG bonus probability (G).

In addition, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot probability is "A", the jackpot time saving grant rate is "B", the small hit probability is "C", the small winning time saving grant rate is "D", and the REG bonus probability is "H", the REG bonus probability "H" is calculated by the following (Formula 4).
H=(A×(1-B))+(C×(1-D))...(Formula 4)
As a result, if the setting value = "0", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/319.6) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362. 0)×(1-(22/100))=1/340.6.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "1", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/291.2) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362.0) x (1-(22/100))=1/331.9.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "2", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/262.1) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362.0) x (1-(22/100))=1/321.8.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "3", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/242.7) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362.0) x (1-(22/100))=1/314.1.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "4", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/225.9) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362.0) x (1-(22/100))=1/306.7.
On the other hand, if the setting value = "5", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/204.8) x (1 - (75/100)) + (1/362.0) x (1-(22/100))=1/296.3.
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the REG bonus probability (H). In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the REG bonus probability (H).

Further, the total bonus probability is calculated in the same manner as the above-mentioned total winning probability.
In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, if the jackpot probability is "A", the small win probability is "C", and the total bonus probability is "I", the total bonus probability "I" is calculated by the following (Formula 5). be done.
I=A+C...(Formula 5)
As a result, if the setting value = "0", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/319.6) + (1/362.0) = 1/169.7 .
On the other hand, when the set value = "1", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/291.2) + (1/362.0) = 1/161.4.
On the other hand, when the setting value = "2", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/262.1) + (1/362.0) = 1/152.0.
On the other hand, when the set value = "3", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/242.7) + (1/362.0) = 1/145.3.
On the other hand, when the set value = "4", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/225.9) + (1/362.0) = 1/139.1.
On the other hand, when the set value = "1", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/204.8) + (1/362.0) = 1/130.8.
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total bonus probability (I). In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total bonus probability (I).

Further, the BIG bonus rate is calculated in the same manner as the above-mentioned composite time saving grant rate.
That is, for the first special symbol lottery, the reciprocal of the jackpot probability is "a", the jackpot time saving grant rate is "B", the reciprocal of the small hit probability is "c", the small hit time saving grant rate is "D", and BIG Assuming that the bonus ratio is "J", the BIG bonus ratio "J" is calculated by the following (Formula 6).
J=(c/(a+c))×B+(a/(a+c))×D...(Formula 6)
As a result, if the setting value = "0", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(319.6+362.0)) x (75/100) + (319. 6/(319.6+362.0))×(22/100)=50.1[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "1", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(291.2+362.0)) x (75/100) + (291.2/( 291.2+362.0))×(22/100)=51.4[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "2", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(262.1+362.0)) x (75/100) + (262.1/( 262.1+362.0))×(22/100)=52.7[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "3", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(242.7+362.0)) x (75/100) + (242.7/( 242.7+362.0))×(22/100)=53.7[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "4", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(225.9+362.0)) x (75/100) + (225.9/( 225.9+362.0))×(22/100)=54.6[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "5", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(204.8+362.0)) x (75/100) + (204.8/( 204.8+362.0))×(22/100)=55.9[%].
In this way, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the BIG bonus ratio (J). In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the BIG bonus ratio (J).

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery fluctuates (changes) according to a set value. On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol lottery, each of the small winning probability, the jackpot time saving grant rate, and the small winning time saving grant rate does not fluctuate (change) depending on the set value. In particular, for the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot time saving grant rate and the small win time saving grant rate are the same (excluding when the limiter function is activated).
With this configuration, even if the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value in the second special symbol lottery, the total time saving award rate does not fluctuate (change) accordingly.
Further, regarding the second special symbol lottery, even if the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, the BIG bonus ratio does not fluctuate (change) accordingly.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the total time saving grant rate (time saving grant rate at the time of winning) is fluctuated (changed) for the first special symbol lottery according to the set value, and the total time saving grant rate is granted for the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to have a configuration in which the rate (time saving grant rate at the time of winning) does not fluctuate (change) depending on the set value.

Here, in the present embodiment, with respect to the first special symbol lottery, on the premise that the larger the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, the jackpot time and time reduction grant rate is higher than the small hit time and time reduction grant rate of the special symbol lottery. The ratio is higher. As a result, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total time saving award rate becomes. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total time saving award rate becomes.
However, regarding the first special symbol lottery, assuming that the larger the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, the jackpot time-saving grant rate is lower than the small-hit time-saving grant rate of the special symbol lottery. It may also be a configuration. As a result, it is possible to configure the first special symbol lottery so that the larger the setting value (the higher the jackpot probability), the lower the total time saving award rate. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to configure such a configuration that the smaller the setting value (the lower the jackpot probability), the higher the total time saving award rate.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which value is set among "0" to "5" as the setting value for the first special symbol lottery, the total time saving grant rate is 50 [ %] or more (in particular, more than 50[%]).
However, for the first special symbol lottery, if at least the upper limit value (the value with which the probability of winning the jackpot is the upper limit) from "0" to "5" is set as the setting value, the total time saving grant rate will be , is 50[%] or more (or exceeds 50[%]), and at least a lower limit value (a value at which the jackpot winning probability is the lower limit) is set, the total time saving grant rate is 50[%] It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number is less than 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot time saving grant rate and the small win time saving grant rate are the same (excluding when the limiter function is activated). As a result, even if the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) in accordance with the set value for the second special symbol lottery, the total time saving award rate does not fluctuate (change) accordingly.
However, regarding the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot time saving grant rate and the small hit time saving grant rate may be configured to be different. As a result, with regard to the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to configure a structure in which the total time saving grant rate fluctuates (changes) as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value.
For example, regarding the second special symbol lottery, when the limiter function is not activated, the jackpot time saving rate and the small hit time saving rate are the same, and when the limiter function is activated, the jackpot time saving rate and the small hit time saving rate are the same. A configuration with different grant rates may be used. With this configuration, for the second special symbol lottery, the total time saving grant rate when the limiter function is not activated does not fluctuate (change) according to the set value (jackpot probability), and the total time saving grant rate when the limiter function is activated However, it is possible to configure the system to fluctuate (change) depending on the set value (jackpot probability).

(About the progress of the game)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (obtain special symbol 1 game information) by entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 arranged on the left path r1. It has become. In addition, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 52 arranged on the right path r2, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (obtain special symbol 2 game information). .
When a "jackpot" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state is generated. In addition, when a "small hit" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), and passage of the V area by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win gaming state is detected, A jackpot gaming condition is generated.
Then, the player can win many prize balls by entering the game ball into the first big winning hole 55a while the jackpot game state is occurring. Therefore, the player plays the game with the aim of causing more jackpot game states.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the total winning probability is higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. In particular, the total winning probability of the second special symbol lottery is extremely high.
As a result, it is easier to generate a jackpot game state in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.
Therefore, it is easier to generate a jackpot gaming state by executing the second special symbol lottery than by executing the first special symbol lottery, which is advantageous to the player.
Therefore, the player plays the game with the aim of acquiring more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery.
However, in order to obtain the opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, you must win the "normal symbol winning" in the normal symbol lottery, and insert the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the regular symbol winning gaming state is occurring. You need to make the ball.
Here, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery is constant (99/100) regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state). On the other hand, the degree of difficulty (easy/difficult) of causing a game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 during the occurrence of the normal game state changes depending on the game state (normal state or time saving state). .

In other words, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning gaming state is Opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is executed based on the difficult (impossible) opening/closing pattern (specifically, the first normal switching pattern).
As a result, during the normal state, even if you win the normal symbol lottery, it becomes difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52, and as a result, the second special symbol lottery becomes difficult (impossible). It becomes difficult (impossible) to obtain opportunities.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the normal state, in order to shift the gaming state to the time saving state by causing the jackpot gaming state, there is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51. Aiming to obtain , the game ball is launched onto the left path r1. Therefore, while the normal state is occurring, the game mainly proceeds with the special symbol 1 variable game.
On the other hand, if a "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the game ball will not enter the second starting port 52 during the normal pattern winning gaming state. The opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is executed based on the opening/closing pattern that is easy (possible) (specifically, the second normal switching pattern).
As a result, when the normal symbol lottery is won during the time saving state, it becomes easy (possible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52, and as a result, there is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. It becomes easy (possible) to obtain
Therefore, while the time saving state is occurring, in order to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting gate 52, the normal symbol lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the starting gate 41 is performed. Aiming to acquire an opportunity, the game ball is launched onto the right path r2. Therefore, while the time saving state is occurring, the game mainly proceeds with the special figure 2 variable game.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the "REG bonus" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the normal state again. As a result, if the "REG bonus" is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes possible to obtain only the prize ball based on the "REG bonus".
On the other hand, when a "BIG bonus" (hereinafter referred to as "first win") is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a time-saving state. As a result, if the "BIG bonus" is won in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes possible to obtain at least a prize ball based on the initial bonus set.
The first bonus set consists of four "bonuses"("BIGbonus" and "REG bonus").

That is, in this embodiment, the total time saving award rate is 100 [%] regarding the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state. Furthermore, the limiter function allows the time saving control to be executed continuously up to two times. As a result, if you win the "first hit", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state will be changed for the two [times] of "bonuses" (hereinafter referred to as "limiter non-activation bonus") including the "first win". The time is shortened, and it becomes easier to obtain the second special symbol lottery opportunity. Then, at the end of the second "bonus" (hereinafter referred to as "limiter activated bonus") that occurs after the "first hit" (the third time including the "first hit"), the limiter function is activated and the limiter is activated. The gaming state after the activation bonus ends becomes the normal state.
Further, in this embodiment, "1" is defined as the upper limit of the number of special drawings 2 reserved. As a result, after the limiter activation bonus ends, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol lottery which has been put on hold. At this time, since the total winning probability of the second special symbol drawing is extremely high, a "bonus" (hereinafter referred to as "remaining pending bonus") will be obtained based on the second special symbol drawing that is pending. becomes possible.

As a result of the above, the first bonus set is 4 [times] "bonus" (2 [times] limiter non-activation bonus + 1 [times] limiter activation bonus + 1 [times] remaining pending bonus) = 4 [times] "bonus" bonus).
Here, the limiter non-activation bonus each time becomes a "BIG bonus" in which time-saving grant control is executed by deactivating the limiter function. On the other hand, the limiter activation bonus is a "BIG bonus" in which the time saving grant control is not executed due to the activation of the limiter function.
In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, there is a probability of 10 [%] for winning the "BIG bonus", and a probability of 90 [%] for winning the "REG bonus". Get elected. Therefore, the remaining pending bonus will be a "BIG bonus" with a probability of 10%, and a "REG bonus" with a probability of 90%.
Particularly, when the remaining reserved bonus that constitutes the initial bonus set is a "REG bonus", the series of bonus states ends when the remaining reserved bonus ends.
On the other hand, when the remaining pending bonus constituting the initial bonus set is a "BIG bonus", the gaming state after the remaining pending bonus ends becomes a time saving state. As a result, the continuous bonus set is executed following the initial bonus set, and it becomes possible to obtain prize balls based on the continuous bonus set.

The continuous bonus set is composed of three "bonuses"("BIGbonus" and "REG bonus").
In other words, if the remaining pending bonus that makes up the initial bonus set is a "BIG bonus," 2 [times] of "bonuses" (limiter activation Regarding the bonus), the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a time-saving state, making it easier to obtain the second special symbol lottery opportunity. Then, at the end of the second "bonus" (limiter activated bonus) that occurs after the remaining pending bonus (remaining retained bonus that constitutes the first bonus set), the limiter function is activated, and after the limiter activated bonus ends, The gaming state becomes the normal state.
In addition, after the limiter activation bonus (limiter activation bonus that constitutes the continuous bonus set) ends, the reserved second special symbol lottery is executed, and a "bonus" (remaining pending bonus) is executed based on the second special symbol lottery. ) can be obtained.

As a result of the above, the continuous bonus set is 3 [times] "bonus" (1 [time] limiter non-activation bonus + 1 [time] limiter activation bonus + 1 [time] remaining pending bonus) = 3 [times] "bonus" bonus).
Then, when the remaining reserved bonus forming the continuous bonus set becomes the "REG bonus", the series of bonus states ends with the end of the remaining reserved bonus.
On the other hand, if the remaining pending bonus that constitutes a continuous bonus set is a "BIG bonus", a new continuous bonus set will be executed following the continuous bonus set, and prize balls based on the new bonus set will be obtained. It becomes possible to do so.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, by executing a V avoidance hit during a bonus set (initial bonus set/continuous bonus set), it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired based on the bonus set. It becomes possible.
"V avoidance hitting" is a gaming technique in which the game ball is fired so as to avoid the game ball from passing through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state.
That is, in this embodiment, the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is extremely high. As a result, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set (initial bonus set/continuous bonus set), a "small win"("BIGbonus") will be won with a very high probability.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the "BIG bonus" is won, the count value of the limiter counter is added at the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, even if you win a "small win"("BIGbonus"), if the game ball does not pass through the V area while the small win gaming state is occurring, the count value of the limiter counter will be added. Never.
Therefore, if you win a "small win"("BIGbonus") based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set, by performing a V avoidance hit, you can change the small win game state (small win game ), it is possible to avoid adding up the count value of the limiter counter while winning the prize ball based on the above.
Here, in this embodiment, at the end of each limiter non-operation bonus, 10 [times] is set as the second time saving number. As a result, even if the jackpot game state does not occur after each limiter non-activation bonus ends, the time saving state continues at least until the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 10 [times]. be done.
As a result, during a bonus set, out of the 10 [times] of second special symbol draws that are executed after each limiter non-activation bonus ends, the bonus is generated based on the second special symbol draw of a predetermined time. Regarding the "small hit"("BIGbonus"), by performing a V avoidance hit, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the bonus set.
At this time, the number of "small hits"("BIG" bonus) for executing the V avoidance hit is arbitrarily determined by the player. That is, in this embodiment, although a very high probability is defined for the composite winning probability of the second special symbol lottery, it is not 100[%]. As a result, winning is not always guaranteed in the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set.
Therefore, a player who prioritizes increasing the number of prize balls obtained during a bonus set may choose to play the V avoidance game out of the "small win"("BIGbonus") that occurs after each limiter non-activation bonus ends. This will increase the number of "small hits" to be executed.
On the other hand, a player who prioritizes avoiding the risk of the time-saving state being terminated may choose to play the V avoidance game among the "small wins"("BIGbonuses") that occur after each limiter non-activation bonus ends. This will reduce the number of small hits.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the bonus set can be varied (increased or decreased) depending on whether or not the V avoidance hit is performed, thereby improving the gameplay. becomes possible.

(About control commands)
Next, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300 and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be explained.
The main control board 200 and the production control board 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command sent from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the production control board 300 by serial communication. When the production control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and by this interrupt processing, data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a regular symbol type designation command, and a regular symbol stop designation command. , game status designation command, pending number designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, V prize designation command, look-ahead designation command, error designation command, demo designation command, etc. are set. There is.

The symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the special symbol. Specifically, the symbol type designation commands include "missing symbols", "small winning symbols"("small winning symbols 1" to "small winning symbols 4"), and "jackpot symbols"("jackpot symbols 1" to "jackpot symbols"). 4)), specify one of the types. The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, the symbol type designation commands are set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The variation pattern designation command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special symbol. The variation pattern designation command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.
The stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of the special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.

The ordinary symbol type designation command is a command that specifies the type of stopping symbol (stopping symbol number) of the ordinary symbol. Specifically, the common symbol type designation command specifies one type among the "missing symbol" and "the common symbol 1". The ordinary symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuating display of ordinary symbols.
The normal pattern stop designation command is a command that specifies the stop display of the normal pattern. The normal pattern stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the normal pattern stop display.
The game state designation command is a command that designates the game state (“normal state” (while time saving control is stopped) or “time saving state” (while time saving control is being executed)). The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special gaming phase described later, and the like.

The pending number specification command is a command that specifies the pending number. In this embodiment, the number of reservations specification command specifies that the number of reservations (the number of special drawings 1 or 2) has increased by "1", that the number of reservations has decreased by "1", the number of reservations, etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of pending notification displays (fluctuating display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notification displays (fluctuating display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device that are pending.
The pending number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when a variable display of special symbols starts, etc. In this embodiment, commands corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the reservation number designation commands.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning gaming state or the jackpot gaming state). The opening designation command specifies the type of the small win game state or the jackpot game state (the type of "small win symbol" or "jackpot symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command specifies one type among "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 4" and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4." The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small win gaming state or the jackpot gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small winning game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates passage of the V area by the game ball. The V winning prize designation command is transmitted when passage of the V area by the game ball is detected.

The look-ahead designation command specifies the type of stop symbol (any type among "missing symbol", "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 4", and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4") This is the command to do this. In this embodiment, the prefetch designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. The error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a right-handed hit error, etc. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 through serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and by processing this interrupt, data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command and the like are set as control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, occurrence/cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. Control commands are set to specify each. Each control command is sent when the occurrence or cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be explained.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control board 200 will be explained.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts hardware random number update processing.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".

In addition, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]), the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, by the hard random number update process, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated. Note that the hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the production control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command sending processing. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, initial setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.

In the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the read result twice, the RAM clear switch 207 is set to the on state. Determine whether or not this is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, a value indicating that an on state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as switch information, and an on state is not generated. If it is determined that no on state has occurred, a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that no on state has occurred is stored as switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and the setting key switch 208 is turned on based on the reading result twice. Determine whether or not. Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, a value indicating that an on state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as switch information, and the on state is not generated. If it is determined that no on state has occurred, a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that no on state has occurred is stored as switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read two times, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is set to the ON state based on the read result two times. Determine whether or not this is occurring. If it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. As a result, the timer counter starts measuring the set wait processing time.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process moves to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to allow access to the work area of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, gaming machine status flag acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process moves to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is determined to be normal. is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process moves to step S1-18.

Here, "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the usage area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7" - The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area.'' Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the usage area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7" The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area.'' If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a power-on clear target area setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) in areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, A backup valid flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, a normal game related area 2, and a stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the on state or not, and if it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process moves to step S1-11, If it is determined that the on state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an on state has occurred, and a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that an on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-12, and the game is started. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to a gaming enabled state, it is determined that a gaming enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a gaming enabled state, the gaming It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process moves to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that this is not true (No), the process moves to step S1-14.
"Setting confirmation conditions" are that the gaming enabled state is occurring, the RAM clear switch 207 is not in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and This is true when the frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state is not occurring. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is saved as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation conditions are met, and a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a clear target area setting process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-15. In the clearing target area setting process when the power is restored, the area to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is the setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.
In step S1-15, initialization processing upon power return is executed, and the process moves to step S1-16. In the power-return initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a sub-command transmission process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-17. In the power-return subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power-return designation command) specifying that the power has been restored from power-off is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, a payout command specifying that the power has been restored from the power cut is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, abnormality clearing target area setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag) are cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230. area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area).
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and read/written checked.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and if it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process moves to step S1-23, and if it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormal state setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the settings confirmation state has occurred (set). If it is determined that the settings confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-25, and the settings If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is determined to have occurred. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a game enable state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process moves to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that this is not true (No), the process moves to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. It holds true if
Here, as described above, if both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the on state has occurred. The value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, which were saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that On the other hand, if a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that the

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, gaming machine state flag saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-29. In the gaming machine state flag saving process, the gaming machine state flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand that specifies that RAM clearing has been executed (RAM clear designation command) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, RAM clear initialization processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-32. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command specifying that RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, subcommand setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is sent to the subcommand output request of the RAM 230. Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the power recovery phase, a subcommand that specifies the gaming state (gaming state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, and a stop symbol for the first special symbol. sub-command to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, sub-command to specify the number of reserved special symbols 1, sub-command to specify the number of reserved special symbols 2, sub-command to specify the value of the time-saving counter, RAM 230 This includes a setting value specifying command for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value area of .

In step S1-34, initial display time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, interrupt setting processing is executed, and the process moves to main loop processing (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, the main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be explained.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-36) shown in FIG. 14 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. 15. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, the process first moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-2. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning symbol random numbers, fluctuating pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (the control command sent from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is memorized (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the production control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted during the period from execution of the interrupt enable processing in step S2-5 until execution of the interrupt disable processing in step S2-1. This is the interrupt permission period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-1. In other random number update processing, soft random numbers excluding winning symbol random numbers (specifically, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, a description will be given of the power-off saving process executed by the CPU 210.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff notice signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff notice signal, it starts the power cutoff saving process shown in FIG. 16 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the power-off saving process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power-off saving process is started, the process first moves to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved to the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, a power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), it is determined whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been inputted (Yes), the process moves to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been inputted (No), the process proceeds to step S3-4. Then, the process moves to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized. As a result, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal is read is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, a power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), it is determined whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been inputted (No), the process moves to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been inputted (Yes). If so, the process moves to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for return determination is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the loop counter for return determination is "0" (Yes), the CPU The process moves to initialization processing (step S1-1), and if it is determined that the value of the loop counter for return determination is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the original processing is resumed. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be explained.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-2. In the register saving process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved to the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, interrupts are permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-5. In port input processing, the status of each switch/sensor (each signal) is acquired.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204). On-state storage areas corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to ports 0 to 3 are provided.
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is acquired, The acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch/sensor, if the detection signal from the switch/sensor is input (high level), "1" is saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor, and When the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is in an on state. At this time, for each switch/sensor, the on state is determined based on the value saved in the input information storage area during the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area during the current port input process. Determine whether it has occurred.
The "on state" refers to a state in which a detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is input (high level).
If it is determined that an on-state has occurred for each switch/sensor, "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on-state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor will be referred to as "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the firing enable condition detection section 422. In the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal of input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal. ) to be done.

In step S4-5, gaming machine status flag acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that a game-enabled state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S4-7, and the game If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not a gaming enabled status has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to a game-ready state, it is determined that a game-ready state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-ready state, a game-ready state is determined to have occurred. It is determined that the

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set). If it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S4-8, and if the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-19. Setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-12. In the winning pattern random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning pattern random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (such as obtaining various random numbers) is executed depending on the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, and 110 (whether or not an on state is detected). The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, special game management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 55b are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal figure display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, state management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-16. In the state management process, occurrence and cancellation of various errors (abnormal states) are monitored. Then, upon detection of occurrence or cancellation of various errors, various settings (such as subcommand settings) are executed. The state management process will be described later.

In step S4-16, winning a prize opening switch processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (updating various counters, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 103a, 103b, 105, 106 (whether or not an on state is detected).
In this embodiment, as a prize ball control counter, a prize ball control counter 1 stores the number of game balls that entered the first starting port 51, and a prize ball control counter 1 stores the number of game balls that entered the second starting port 52. The prize ball control counter 2 stores the number of game balls that entered the first big prize opening 55a, and the prize ball control counter 3 stores the number of game balls that entered the second big winning hole 56a. A prize ball control counter 4 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the left other winning holes 57a to 57d, and a prize ball control counter 5 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the right other winning hole 59. A prize ball control counter 6 is set.
In the prize opening switch process, it is determined whether or not the on state is detected for the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101, and if it is determined that the on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 1. do.
Further, it is determined whether or not the on state is detected for the special figure 2 starting opening switch 102, and when it is determined that the on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 2.
Further, it is determined whether or not an on state is detected for the first count switch 103a, and when it is determined that an on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 3.
Further, it is determined whether or not an on state is detected for the second count switch 103b, and when it is determined that an on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 4.
Further, it is determined whether or not the on state is detected for the left winning opening switch 106, and when it is determined that the on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 5.
In addition, it is determined whether or not the on state is detected for the right winning opening switch 105, and when it is determined that the on state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 6.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 5 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 6 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left path r1 is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right path r2 is specified (at the start of the small hit game state) , at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.), set "1" in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and send a subcommand that designates launching the game ball to the right path r2 from the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. to be memorized. As a result, a sub-command specifying launching of the game ball to the right path r2 is transmitted to the production control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the state in which the launch of the game ball to the right path r2 is specified to the state to specify the launch of the game ball to the left path r1 (such as when the time saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 Set "0" to "0".

In step S4-19, external information management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to external devices (electronic devices such as hall computers and data display devices) includes symbol confirmation number information, starting opening information, jackpot information, security information, and out opening. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are specified.
The "design confirmed number of times information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuating display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to symbol confirmation number information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the special symbol stop display reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the ball entry ports (starting ports) 51 and 52. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101, 102 is detected.
“Jackpot information” is external information regarding the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
"Outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out hole payout number information to the hole computer every time the value of the out ball counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a settings change state is occurring, a settings confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). If it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation number counter has reached a predetermined value, symbol confirmation number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, symbol confirmation number information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information starting port entry number counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). If it is determined that the value of the external information starting port entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting port entry number counter. As a result, starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot number counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot number counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information out pitch counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out pitch number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the outside information out pitch number counter. As a result, the outlet payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to a gaming enabled status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value that corresponds to a game-enabled status (corresponding to a setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting abnormality status, RAM abnormality status, or backup abnormality status). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, LED display setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is being
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, a normal time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (abnormal setting state, abnormal RAM state, or abnormal backup state), an abnormal time display data setting process to be described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is set as output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are "state before opening of the first big winning hole", "first big winning hole opening control state", and "first big winning hole closing effective state". , "First grand prize opening end wait state", "Second grand prize opening state before opening", "Second grand prize opening control state", "Second grand prize opening closing effective state", and "Second grand prize opening opening state" It is determined whether the value specifies any special game phase among the winning opening opening end wait state.
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "state before opening of the first big winning hole", "first big winning hole opening control state", "first big winning hole closing effective state", and "first big winning hole opening state". "1st prize opening end wait state", "2nd prize opening pre-opening state", "2nd prize opening control state", "2nd prize opening closing effective state", and "2nd prize opening opening state" If it is determined that the value specifies one of the special game phases in the "end wait state", the symbol information set in the confirmed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 ("small winning symbol" or "jackpot symbol") A value indicating the type) is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired symbol information is set as output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "state before opening of the first big winning hole", "first big winning hole opening control state", "first big winning hole closing effective state", and "first big winning hole opening state". "1st prize opening end wait state", "2nd prize opening pre-opening state", "2nd prize opening control state", "2nd prize opening closing effective state", and "2nd prize opening opening state" If it is determined that the value of "End Wait State" does not designate any special game phase, the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data c.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the jackpot gaming state (type of jackpot gaming state) is displayed by the LEDs 19 to 23. is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the route (left route r1 or right route r2) in which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the general figure reservation counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data f.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Note that in the pachinko machine 1, the output data g is not set.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special symbols 1, the LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special symbols 2, and the LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of regular symbols reserved. The number of pending games is displayed, and the LED 32 displays the current gaming state (running or stopping time saving control).
Note that, as described above, the LED 31 is not used and no information is displayed by the LED 31.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the "-" Display data (8 bits) is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the letter "n." is displayed by LED49 to LED56. -" characters are displayed, and the LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set values.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that a setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. Display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that display data is not set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "r" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the letter "n." is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the setting is made by the LEDs 57 to 64. A number indicating the value will be displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the error that occurs is Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that display data is not set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "E" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "r." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the letter "r." is displayed by LED57 to LED64. A number indicating the code will be displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, solenoid data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) to be output to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66-68 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66-68, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output ports 2, 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Furthermore, each of the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, and 66 to 68 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-24. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time saving control execution state, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the original processing is resumed. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be explained.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first moves to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clearing processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.

In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.
In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3"). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-6.
In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".

In addition, in the common output process, output data of the firing permission signal is output to the output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set).
If it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, output data that sets the firing permission signal to a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, a launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the game-enabled state has not occurred, output data that sets the firing permission signal to a low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not a game enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-enabled state, the game It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.
In this embodiment, the output of the firing permission signal is set only when it is determined in the common output process that a game-enabled state has occurred. As a result, the firing permission signal is output only while the game-enabled state is occurring (setting). However, in the common output process, the output of the firing permission signal may be set regardless of the gaming machine state. With this configuration, a launch permission signal can be output at all times while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S29-7, and the game is started. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not a game enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-enabled state, the game It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is a common This is the display data set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are transmitted to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-10. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-4). The performance display device output process will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or abnormal time display data setting process), the display data becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are transmitted to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be explained.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first moves to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Further, all stack pointer values used during execution of processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value of the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The displayed data will be displayed.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register saved in step S30-1 are The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing ends, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. This allows execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be explained.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first moves to step S37-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a settings change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a settings change state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S37-2, and the setting change state is set. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is a value corresponding to a setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a setting change state, the setting change state is determined to have occurred. It is determined that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded) and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process moves to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. If it is determined that 207 has not been pressed (No), the process moves to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not been generated, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and the setting value stored in the register is determined to be less than a predetermined setting comparison value. If it is determined that the set value is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is greater than or equal to the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process moves to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is set to the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined that it is less than the value (Yes), the process moves to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is overwritten as the setting value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, a setting value saving process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting values stored in the register are saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (in the OFF state) (No), The process moves to step S37-9, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it has not been done.
In step S37-9, subcommand setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end designation command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the gaming state (gaming state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the second special symbol. Sub-command that specifies the symbol, sub-command that specifies the number of reserved special figures 1, sub-command that specifies the number of reserved special figures 2, sub-command that specifies the value of the time-saving counter, settings stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 Includes setting value specification commands that specify values.
In step S37-11, a ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, a game ready state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is saved as a value in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management processing)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be explained.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first moves to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process moves to step S5-2, and the gate If it is determined that the on state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process moves to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal pattern starting ball detection process is executed, and the process moves to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special drawing 1 starting port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), step If the process moves to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process moves to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, special figure 1 starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special drawing 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), step If the process moves to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process moves to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, special figure 2 starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether the on-state of the V-area switch 110 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on-state of the V-area switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process moves to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-13).

In step S5-8, a V passage detection process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passing detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V is in the valid period.
The "V validity period" is from the start of the first round (small winning game) while the small winning gaming state is occurring until the big winning opening closing effective time (interval time) after the end of the first round has elapsed. period.
If it is determined that it is within the V validity period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the V is not within the valid period, the process ends and the process moves to the next process (step S4-13).
In the present embodiment, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "first big winning hole opening control state" or the "first big winning hole closing effective state". If so, it is determined that the V winning prize is valid. If the value corresponds to another special game phase, it is determined that the V winning prize is not valid.

(Full pattern starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal figure starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be explained.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern starting ball detection process.
When the normal figure starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first moves to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a general pattern random number acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S6-2. In the regular symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the regular symbol lottery.

In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the general figure reservation number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure reservation number counter is not the upper limit value If (No), the process moves to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S5-3) is performed. Move on to 3).
Here, in the present embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit of the number of reserved ordinary figures (value of the number of reserved ordinary figures counter). However, in a configuration where the normal pattern hold is not set (during normal play (during normal pattern fluctuation display, normal pattern stop display, or normal pattern per game state occurring), normal pattern game information is acquired. There is no problem with a configuration in which the Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved general drawings may be changed as appropriate between "1" and "4".
In step S6-3, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary drawings counter is executed, and the process moves to step S6-4. In the ordinary figure reservation number counter updating process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the ordinary figure reservation number counter is newly set in the ordinary figure reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, a general pattern random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal figure game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 where the game information of the game being played is stored, and a game information storage area where the game information of the game where the winning/loss determination of the game is pending is stored. has been done.
The general figure game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing general figure game information.
The priority order of each storage area is defined in order of priority: storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower). Then, for the standard game information stored in the standard game information storage area, the standard game winning/losing determination is performed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the highest priority order.
In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area as normal figure game information. At this time, the general figure game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the current value of the number of reserved common symbols counter = "1", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. If the current value of the common figure reservation counter is "2", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. If the current value of the reserved number of common symbols counter = "3", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. If the current value of the reserved number of ordinary figures counter = "4", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first moves to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Further, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting port entry number counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S7-3. In the reservation number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is set in the reservation number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first moves to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Further, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting port entry number counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S8-3. In the reservation number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is set in the reservation number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition processing in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be explained.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first moves to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, special symbol identification value acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation number counter) number or special map 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, special figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-4. In the special pattern random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random values) such as jackpot random numbers, hit pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit value, and the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit value. If it is determined that (No), the process moves to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5). -5, move to S5-7).
In this embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 reserved. In addition, "1" is defined as the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2.
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S9-6. In the special figure reservation number counter update process, the value set in the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to the above is newly set in the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, special figure random number storage processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information) of the RAM 230 as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information). information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 has storage area 0 where special figure game information during game execution is stored, special figure 1 game information storage area where special figure 1 game information whose start determination is pending, and special figure 1 game information storage area where start determination is pending. It is configured to include a special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special figure 1 game information.
The priority order of each storage area is defined in order of priority: storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower). Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is performed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the highest priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include one storage area as a storage area where the special figure 2 game information can be stored.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special symbol 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas.
That is, when the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special symbol 2 game information to play the special symbol 2 game. Store in the storage area of the information storage area.

In step S9-7, a command setting process for specifying the number of reservations is executed, and the process moves to step S9-8. In the reservation number designation command setting process, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the number of reserved special drawings (the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2) has been increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a reserved number designation command that specifies that the special symbol 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special symbol 2 reservation number has increased by "1" is stored in the RAM 230. is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (steps S5-5 and S5-7). In the preliminary determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information storage area) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "game information subject to preliminary determination"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, preliminary determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
Note that for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is being executed. Regarding this, a configuration may be adopted in which preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special symbol per determination process is executed.
In the advance special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (preliminary special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special pattern jackpot lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a special pattern small win lottery table in which the small win value of the special symbol lottery is registered.
Further, as a special figure jackpot lottery table, a special figure jackpot lottery table corresponding to each setting value ("0" to "5") is stored.
In addition, as a special figure small hit lottery table, there is a special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 gaming information (first special symbol lottery) and a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 gaming information (second special symbol lottery). A small winning lottery table is stored.
In the advance special figure hit determination process, first, the advance special figure jackpot determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special chart jackpot determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the set value area is confirmed, and the special chart jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (preliminary special pattern jackpot determination) based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read special pattern jackpot lottery table.
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the preliminary judgment target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (the special symbol lottery The result is determined to be a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination does not match the jackpot value registered in the special map jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won by the preliminary special figure jackpot determination process, then the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure small hit determination process, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the preliminary determination target game information is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination and the read out special figure small win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small win" has been won (preliminary special figure small win determination). .
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the preliminary judgment target game information matches the small win value registered in the special map small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the symbol lottery is determined to be a "small hit"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination does not match the small win value registered in the special figure small win lottery table, it is determined that the "small win" has not been won.
If it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won by the preliminary special symbol small hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss".

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special pattern determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special design determination).
In the preliminary special pattern pattern determination process, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the preliminary special pattern hit determination, the type of the "jackpot symbol" is determined (preliminary special pattern pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and types of "jackpot symbols"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4") are registered.
In addition, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, there is a jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to special symbol 1 gaming information (first special symbol lottery), a jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to special symbol 2 gaming information (second special symbol lottery), is stored.
In the process of determining the type of "jackpot symbol", the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the preliminary determination target game information is checked, and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is Read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read jackpot symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, if the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information is the special symbol 1 game information, either "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, either "jackpot symbol 3" or "jackpot symbol 4" is determined.

On the other hand, in the preliminary special pattern determination process, when it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the preliminary special pattern winning determination, the type of the "small winning symbol" is determined (preliminary special pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small winning symbol"("small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 4") is registered.
In addition, as a small winning pattern lottery table, there is a small winning pattern drawing table corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information (first special pattern drawing) and a small winning pattern drawing table corresponding to the special pattern 2 gaming information (second special pattern drawing). The table and are stored.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small winning symbol", the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is checked, and the small winning symbol corresponding to this confirmation result is Read the lottery table. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, if the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, either "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, either "jackpot symbol 3" or "jackpot symbol 4" is determined.
On the other hand, in the advance special symbol determination process, when it is determined that it is a "miss" (defeated) by the advance special symbol hit determination, a "miss symbol" is determined as the type of the stop symbol (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the preliminary determination process, next, a prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the prefetch designation command setting process, a prefetch designation command that designates the type of stop symbol determined by the advance special symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the phase/stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") is a "special symbol change waiting state". , "Special figure fluctuating state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "First grand prize opening state before opening", "First grand prize opening control state", and "First grand prize opening state" ``Closed effective state'', ``First grand prize opening opening end wait state'', ``Second grand prize opening pre-opening state'', ``Second grand prize opening control state'', and ``Second grand prize opening closed state''. "Valid state" and "Second big prize opening opening end wait state" are defined.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores special game control modules (programs) corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first moves to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, special game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, special game control module execution processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special pattern fluctuation waiting state", a special pattern fluctuation waiting process to be described later is started, and the "special pattern fluctuation state" is started. If the value corresponds to , the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "first major winning opening pre-opening state", the first major winning opening pre-opening process to be described later is started, and the value corresponds to the "first major winning opening opening control state". In this case, the first big winning opening opening control process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening closing valid state", the first big winning opening closing valid process described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "1st big winning hole opening end wait state", the 1st big winning hole opening end wait process described later is started, and it corresponds to the "2nd big winning hole opening state". If the value corresponds to the "Second Grand Prize Port Opening Control State", the second major prize opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "Second Grand Prize Port Opening Control State", the second major prize opening opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole closing valid state", the second big winning hole closing valid process described later is started, and the "second big winning hole opening end wait state" is started. ”, a second major winning opening opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure fluctuation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation waiting process.
When the special figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process moves to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) The process moves to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes), the process moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) Then, the process moves to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No), the process moves to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special figure reservation number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more.
Then, when the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, a value (in this embodiment, "1") that specifies the game based on the special figure 2 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. At the same time as setting, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not ``1'' or more (the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is ``0''), the special figure 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. A value (in this embodiment, "0") that specifies a game based on is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter.
As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, Start determination is performed.

In step S11-4, a command setting process for specifying the number of reservations is executed, and the process moves to step S11-5. In the reservation number designation command setting process, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the number of reserved special figures has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special symbol 2 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a reservation number designation command specifying that the special symbol 1 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, special symbol storage area shift processing is executed, and the process moves to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area where game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the storage contents of the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired. Next, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6").
If it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than a predetermined setting comparison value (or more than a predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine status flag area (gaming machine status flag) in the RAM 230 is set to an abnormal setting state. Save the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process moves to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process moves to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-8. In the special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special pattern hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, a special figure jackpot determination process is executed.
In the special figure jackpot determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the set value area is confirmed, and the special figure jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read special pattern jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" (special symbol lottery). Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is It is determined that it is a “big hit” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special map jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
If it is determined by the special figure jackpot determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, a special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, based on the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read out special pattern small winning lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small hit" or not. (Special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the small winning value registered in the special pattern small winning lottery table, the special symbol lottery is The result is determined to be a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 does not match the small win value registered in the special map small win lottery table, the "small hit" has been won. It is determined that there is no.
If it is determined by the special pattern small hit determination process that the "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss".

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-9. In the special pattern determination process, the type of the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined (special pattern determination).
Specifically, in the special pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be a "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the type of "jackpot symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read jackpot symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, if the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, either "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, either "jackpot symbol 3" or "jackpot symbol 4" is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the special pattern winning determination, the type of the "small winning symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, the small winning symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, as mentioned above, if the game information stored in storage area 0 is special figure 1 game information, either "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is determined. .
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, one of the "small winning symbols 3" and "small winning symbols 4" is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "miss" (lost) by the special pattern hit determination, a "miss symbol" is determined as the type of the stopped symbol.
Next, symbol information specifying the determined type of stopped symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-9, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-11. In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as stop symbol number lottery tables, there is a symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of a jackpot that corresponds to a "big hit", a symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of a small hit that corresponds to a "small hit", and a stop symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of a loss that corresponds to a "miss". A symbol number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop symbol number lottery table, there is a jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and a jackpot symbol number lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information). A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is confirmed, and the jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out jackpot stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of a small hit is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out small win stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "miss" (defective) by the special symbol winning determination, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of failure is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out stopping symbol number lottery table upon failure.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-12. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed. If the result of the special figure win determination is a failure (“miss”), a special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of failure, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure winning determination is a win ("big hit" or "small win"), a winning special symbol fluctuation mode determination process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of loss, reach group determination is first performed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
In the reach group determination, first, the reservation type (the type of game information stored in storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations, and the game state ("normal state" or " Check the reach group determination table corresponding to this confirmation result.Here, the gaming state is the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" to "6"). ”).
Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of loss, next, a variation mode determination at the time of loss is executed.
In the fluctuation mode determination at the time of rejection, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variable mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is registered.
Further, as the variable mode determination table, a variable mode determination table at the time of losing and a variable mode determination table at the time of winning are stored.
Further, as a failure time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each reach group number (each type of reach group) is stored.
In addition, as a winning variation mode determination table, the reservation type (type of game information stored in storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information)) and the type of stopped symbol (``jackpot symbol 1'') Winning variable mode determination corresponding to each combination of ~“Jackpot symbol 4” or “Small prize symbol 1” to “Small prize symbol 4”) and the gaming state (“Normal state” or “Time saving state”) table is stored.
In particular, in each fluctuation mode determination table, each reach mode random number is associated with a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the fluctuation pattern determination table). . As a result, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each fluctuation mode determination table.
In the failure time fluctuation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the loss time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read out fluctuation mode determination table at the time of loss, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined. , is determined.
In the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of losing, next, a variation pattern determination at the time of losing is executed.
In the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
Furthermore, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored as variation pattern determination tables.
In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of rejection, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the fluctuation mode determination at the time of rejection is read out.
Then, the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) is determined based on the variable pattern random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read variable pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of winning, first, the variation mode determination at the time of winning is executed.
In the winning variation mode determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and variation pattern table are determined.
In the winning variable mode determination, first, the reservation type (the type of game information stored in storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information)) and the type of stopped symbols ("Jackpot symbol 1" ~ "Jackpot symbol 4" or "Small prize symbol 1" to "Small prize symbol 4") and the gaming state ("Normal state" or "Time saving state") are confirmed, and the winning time corresponds to this confirmation result. The variable mode determination table is read. Here, the gaming state is determined based on the value ("0" to "6") set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a variation pattern determination table are determined. , is determined.
In the winning special symbol variation mode determination process, next, a winning variation pattern determination is performed.
In the winning variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a variable pattern command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-14. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for variable display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained. Then, the obtained variable time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S11-15. In the special figure variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure fluctuation processing)
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation processing.
When the special figure fluctuation processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process moves to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, the number of times cut management process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-3. The number-of-times management process will be described later.

In step S12-3, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the obtained stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the obtained stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-4, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-5. In the special symbol stop time setting process, the special symbol stop time is set in the special game timer.
Specifically, in the special figure stop time setting process, it is determined whether the value set in the time saving final game flag area of the RAM 230 is "1". Then, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving final game flag area is "1", the special stop time is set in the special game timer. When it is determined that the value set in the time saving final game flag area is not "1" (it is "0"), the normal stop time is set in the special game timer.
As a result, when the stop display of the special symbols related to the time-saving final game is started, the special stop time (8.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time. On the other hand, when the stop display of special symbols other than the time-saving final game is started, the normal stop time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time.

In step S12-5, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-6. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information confirmation number counter.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 8, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, special figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-14). In the special figure variation display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Number of times cut management processing)
Next, the number-of-times cutting management process executed in step S12-2 will be explained.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the number-of-times cut management process.
When the number-of-times management process is executed in step S12-2, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first moves to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that the time saving control is being executed (Yes), the process moves to step S28-2, where the time saving control is being executed. If it is determined that it is not (stopped) (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S12-3).
Here, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0", It is determined that time saving control is not in progress.
In step S28-2, a first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S28-3. In the first time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter.

In step S28-3, it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving counter after the update is "0" or less (whether "time-saving end condition 1" is satisfied), and the value of the first time-saving counter after the update is determined. If it is determined that the value of is not less than "0"("time saving end condition 1" is not satisfied) (No), the process moves to step S28-4, and the value of the first time saving counter after the update is "0" or less ("time saving end condition 1" is satisfied) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-7.
In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", and if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1" (Yes), step S28- 5, and if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is not “1” (special symbol discrimination flag setting value is “0”) (No), the series of processes is ended and the next process is performed. The process moves to (step S12-3).

In step S28-5, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S28-6. In the second time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether the value of the second time saving counter after the update is "0" or less (whether "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied), and the value of the second time saving counter after the update is determined. If it is determined that the value of the second time saving counter is less than "0"("time saving end condition 2" is satisfied) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-7, and the value of the second time saving counter after the update is "0". If it is determined that the process is not less than or equal to ``time saving termination condition 2'' (``time saving termination condition 2'' is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S12-3).
In step S28-7, time saving control stop processing is executed, and the process moves to step S28-8. In the time saving control stop processing, "0" (a value corresponding to when the time saving control is stopped) is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). As a result, time saving control is stopped.
In step S28-8, a time saving final game flag setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S28-9. In the time saving final game flag setting process, "1" (value corresponding to the time saving final game) is set in the time saving final game flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S28-9, sub-command setting processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S12-3). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in the gaming state (stopping of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure suspension processing)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first moves to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, a time-saving final game flag cancellation process is executed, and the process moves to step S13-3. In the time-saving final game flag cancellation process, "0" (value corresponding to the non-time-saving final game) is set in the time-saving final game flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-3, it is determined whether the type of the stopped symbol is a "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4"), and it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is a "jackpot symbol". If so (Yes), the process moves to step S13-4, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process moves to step S13-9. Here, the type of the stopped symbol is determined based on the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area.
In step S13-4, a gaming state update process is executed, and the process moves to step S13-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1" (a value corresponding to the time saving control being executed). If it is determined that the value set in the time-saving control flag area is "1", "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter and second time-saving counter), and , sets "0" (a value corresponding to when the time saving control is stopped) in the time saving control flag area. As a result, time saving control is stopped and a "normal state" is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is not "1" (it is "0"), the process moves to the next process (step S13-5).

In step S13-5, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the first special electric accessory 55b is set.
The ROM 220 stores special electric combination control tables corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each special electric role control table includes the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning hole, the closing time for the big winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and the opening/closing time corresponding to each round (round game). The number of times of switching, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a corresponding to each open/close switch, etc. are defined.
In the special electric win control data setting process, the special electric win control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is read out, and the read special electric win control table is stored in the RAM 230. Set in the special electric role control table area. In addition, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-6, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-7, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the type of "jackpot symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 is set (saved) in the confirmed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230, and then the symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized/initialized). value). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set.

In step S13-9, it is determined whether the type of the stop symbol is a "small win symbol"("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 4"), and the type of the stop symbol is a "small win symbol". If it is determined that this is the case (Yes), the process moves to step S13-10, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "small winning symbol" (it is a "missing symbol"), the process proceeds to step S13-10. The process moves to S13-14. Here, the type of the stopped symbol is determined based on the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area.
In step S13-10, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-11. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the second special electric accessory 56b is set.
The ROM 220 stores special electric combination control tables (for small winnings) corresponding to each type of "small winning symbols". Each special electric prize control table (for small winnings) includes the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning hole, the closing time for the big winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of small winning games), and each round (small winning game). The number of times of opening/closing switching corresponding to the winning game), the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the second special electric accessory solenoid 65b corresponding to each opening/closing switching, and the number of opening/closing switching corresponding to each round (small winning game) Control data (solenoid control data, control time data), etc. of the V-area solenoid 66 are defined.
In the special electric win control data setting process, the special electric win control table (for small hit) corresponding to the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is read out, and the read special electric win control table (for small hit) is read out. A win control table (for small wins) is set in the special electric win control table area of the RAM 230. In addition, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-11, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-12, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-13. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the type of "small winning symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 is set (saved) in the confirmed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230, and then the symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized/initialized). set value). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first big prize opening" is set.

In step S13-14, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized and initial values are set). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special symbol change waiting state" is set.

(First prize opening pre-opening process)
Next, the first grand prize opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening pre-opening process.
When the first big prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process moves to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation count update process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter. Further, "1" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command that designates the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching frequency setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-5. In the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching frequency corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is read out. . Then, the read-out switching frequency is set in the special electric switching switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric prize winning number counter.
In step S14-5, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S14-6. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First prize opening control process)
Next, the first big prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening control process.
When the first big prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process moves to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S16-4. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and the value of the special electric prize winning number counter reaches a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit (No) Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a big prize opening control end process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-6. In the grand prize opening control termination process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the second special electric accessory 56b is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S16-6, a big prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-7. In the special winning opening closing valid time setting process, the special electric winning opening control table set in the special electric winning opening control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the predetermined big winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set to the special game timer. Set to .
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command that designates the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening closing valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(1st grand prize opening closure effective processing)
Next, the first grand prize opening closing validating process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening closing validating process.
When the first big prize opening closing validating process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process moves to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process moves to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special power continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process moves to step S17-9.
Here, with reference to the special power role control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds specified in the special power role control table is obtained as a specified value and the determination is made.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If (Yes), the process moves to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process moves to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, a game state update process is executed, and the process moves to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1". If it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is "1", "0" is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). , set "0" in the time saving control flag area. As a result, time saving control is stopped and a "normal state" is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is not "1" (it is "0"), the process moves to the next process (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the first special electric accessory 55b is set.
The ROM 220 stores special electric combination control tables (for jackpots) corresponding to each type of "small winning symbols". Each special electric role control table (for jackpots) includes the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning hole, the closing time for the big winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching corresponding to the opening/closing switching, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric win control data setting process, the special electric win control table (for jackpot) corresponding to the type of "small hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read special electric win control table (for jackpot) is read out. is set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S17-6, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the start of a jackpot gaming state is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, a big prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S17-10. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, the special winning opening control table set in the special winning opening control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first big prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, ending designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-13. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(1st big prize opening end wait processing)
Next, the first big prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening end wait process.
When the first big prize opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first moves to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special symbol fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(2nd grand prize opening pre-opening process)
Next, the second grand prize opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening pre-opening process.
When the second grand prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first moves to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, a special electric role continuous operation count updating process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-3. In the special electric role continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter. Further, "1" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S40-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command that designates the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-5. In the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching frequency corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is read out. . Then, the number of switching times that has been read out is set in the special power switching switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the special electric prize winning number counter.
In step S40-5, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S40-6. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second prize opening control process)
Next, the second big prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening control process.
When the second big prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process moves to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S41-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S41-4. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and the value of the special electric winning prize number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S41-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric award winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit (No) Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a big prize opening control end process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-6. In the grand prize opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the first special electric accessory 55b is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S41-6, a big prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-7. In the special winning opening closing valid time setting process, the special electric winning opening control table set in the special electric winning opening control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the predetermined big winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set to the special game timer. Set to .
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command that designates the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening closing valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second grand prize opening closure effective processing)
Next, the second grand prize opening closing validating process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening closing validating process.
When the second big prize opening closing validating process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 37, first, the process moves to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process moves to step S42-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special power continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process moves to step S42-6.
Here, with reference to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and the determination is made. .

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, the special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer. Further, "0" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-4, ending designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S42-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, a big prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S42-7. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, the special winning opening control table set in the special winning opening control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second grand prize opening end wait processing)
Next, the second grand prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening end wait process.
When the second big prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 38, first, the process moves to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, a gaming state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, a game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, the type of stop symbol ("jackpot symbol" or "small win symbol") specified by the symbol information stored in the confirmed symbol information storage area and the execution time of start determination are determined. , and set the values of the time saving counters (the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter) according to the confirmation result.
At this time, if "Jackpot 1"("Jackpot Symbol 1") is won as a result of the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the first 2 Set "0" as the value of the time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Jackpot 2"("Jackpot Symbol 2") is won as a result of the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second Set "10" as the value of the time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Jackpot 3"("Jackpot Symbol 3") is won as a result of the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second Set "10" as the value of the time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Jackpot 4"("Jackpot Symbol 4") is won as a result of the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and "0" is set as the value of the second time saving counter. Set "0" as the value.
On the other hand, if "Jackpot 4"("Jackpot Symbol 4") is won as a result of the start determination executed during execution of time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and "14" is set as the value of the second time saving counter. Set "10" as the value.
On the other hand, if "Small win 1"("Small win pattern 1") is won as a result of the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "0" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Small win 2"("Small win pattern 2") is won by the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "10" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Small win 3"("Small win pattern 3") is won by the start determination performed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "10" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, if "Small hit 4"("Small winning pattern 4") is won as a result of the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving control is set to "0". Set "0" as the value of the counter.
On the other hand, if "Small hit 4"("Small winning pattern 4") is won as a result of the start determination executed during execution of the time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving control is executed. Set "10" as the value of the counter.
In the gaming state setting process, next, when at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to a value of "1" or more, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. do.
On the other hand, when "0" is set for both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, the state where "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained.

In step S43-3, limiter management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S43-4. In the limiter management process, activation/deactivation of the limiter function is managed.
Specifically, in the limiter management process, first, it is determined whether "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
If it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, first, it is determined whether the value of the limiter counter has reached a predetermined limit value (in this embodiment, 2 [times]). judge. If it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has reached the predetermined limit value, a limiter activation process to be described later is executed and the process moves to the next process (step S43-4).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has not reached the predetermined limit value, "1" is added to the value of the limiter counter, and the process moves to the next process (step S43-4). In this case, the limiter activation process is not executed, and the values set in each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter) and the value set in the time saving control flag area are maintained. be done.
In the limiter activation process, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter and second time-saving counter). Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area. Furthermore, the value of the limiter counter is cleared (the initial value is set to "0"). As a result, when the limiter activation process is executed, the time saving control is not started even though the conditions for starting the time saving control are met.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the value of the limiter counter is cleared (initial value = "0" is set). , the process moves to the next process (step S43-4). In this case, the values set in each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter) and the value set in the time saving control flag area are maintained.
After the limiter management process ends, if "0" is set in the time-saving control flag field, time-saving control is not started, and if "1" is set in the time-saving control flag field, time-saving control is started.

In step S43-4, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, first, the confirmed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized and initial values are set). Further, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special symbol change waiting state" is set.

(Special electric opening/closing switching process)
Next, the special electric role opening/closing switching process in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be explained.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special electric role opening/closing switching process.
When the special power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, the process first moves to step S15-1, as shown in FIG. 39.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55b, 56b to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special power control data setting process, the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special power opening/closing switching counter is set. Read data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the special electric accessory solenoids 65a and 65b is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory solenoids 55b and 56b are controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, special electric role control time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role switching frequency counter is set. Read out. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). . In the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, as a phase/stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase") of a game executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game"), "waiting for normal symbol fluctuation""State","Public figure fluctuating state", "Public figure stopped symbol display state", "Public figure electrical accessory opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective" Seven states are defined: ``state'' and ``common electric accessories release end wait state''.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module (program) corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first moves to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, processing based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", a general pattern fluctuation waiting process to be described later is started, and the process corresponds to the "normal pattern fluctuation state". If it is a value, the process during normal pattern fluctuation will be started, which will be described later.If the value corresponds to the ``normal pattern stopped symbol display state'', the process during normal pattern fluctuation, which will be described later, will be started, If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory release control state", the normal electric accessory release pre-processing described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory release control state", the normal electric accessory release control processing described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state", the normal electric accessory closing valid processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening end wait state" , a normal electric accessory opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Public figure change waiting process)
Next, the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process.
When the ordinary figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first moves to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes), , the process moves to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation counter is not greater than "1" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). do.
In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved general drawings is executed, and the process moves to step S20-3. In the general map reservation number update process, the general map reservation number is updated.
Specifically, in the process of updating the number of reserved ordinary figures, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the ordinary figure reserved number counter.
Next, the storage area where the general game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the storage contents of storage area 1 of the standard game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the standard game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal pattern win/loss determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (common symbol winning/losing determination).
The ROM 220 stores a regular symbol winning/losing lottery table in which the winning values of the regular symbol lottery are registered.
In the normal figure winning/losing judgment process, the normal figure winning/losing determination is executed based on the winning random number included in the normal figure game information stored in the storage area 0 and the normal figure winning/losing lottery table.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be a "normal symbol winning" (winning). .
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal pattern stop pattern determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop pattern determination process, the type (stop pattern number) of the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern stop pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a "normal pattern hit" (winning) has been determined by the normal pattern hit/lose determination.
Then, when it is determined by the winning/losing judgment of a "winning pattern" (winning), the type of "pattern winning pattern"("design1") is determined (design determining pattern winning pattern).
The ROM 220 stores a winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "symbol per winning symbol"("design 1 per winning symbol") is registered.
In the determination of the symbol per common symbol, the symbol lottery table for the common symbol is read out. Then, the type of the symbol per ordinary symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the ordinary symbol game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read ordinary symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if a "miss" (lost) is determined by the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol, a "miss symbol" is determined as the type of the stopped symbol.
In the normal symbol stopping symbol determination process, next, the determined stopping symbol type (stopping symbol number) is stored in the stopping symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, next, a common symbol symbol type designation command that designates the determined type of the stopped symbol is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-5, a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (common pattern variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a common pattern variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
In addition, as a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to each gaming state ("normal state" and "time saving state") is stored.
In the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, first, the gaming state ("normal state" or "time saving state") is confirmed, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Here, the gaming state is determined based on the value (“0” or “1”) set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the common figure game information stored in storage area 0 and the read common figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S20-6, a normal figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-7. In the ordinary figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-5 is acquired. Then, the obtained variable time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general figure fluctuation display data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-8. In the ordinary figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the ordinary figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the ordinary figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the ordinary figure display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the ordinary figure display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the ordinary figure display device, the lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is performed.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, the lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device is controlled.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuating state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during general figure fluctuation)
Next, the normal pattern fluctuation process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation process.
When the ordinary figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first moves to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S21-2. However, if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general figure display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a regular figure fluctuation display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the ordinary figure fluctuation display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the ordinary figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, ordinary figure stop display data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S21-5. In the ordinary figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the ordinary figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stopped symbol number stored in the stopped symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop symbol number is set as the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the ordinary figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stopped and displayed).
In step S21-5, a normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer. Further, the general pattern stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during general map suspension)
Next, the general map stop process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the normal map stop processing.
When the general map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first moves to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped symbol is a "symbol per common symbol", and if it is determined that the stopped symbol is not a "symbol per common symbol" (No), the process moves to step S22-3. However, if it is determined that the stopped symbol is a "normal symbol" (Yes), the process moves to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S22-4, a normal electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S22-5. In the normal electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric role control table corresponding to each combination of the gaming state ("normal state" or "time saving state") and the type of symbol per common symbol ("symbol 1 per common symbol"). has been done.
Each normal electric function control table includes the normal electric function opening time, the normal electric function closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of opening/closing switching, and the control data of the ordinary electric functional solenoid 64 corresponding to each opening/closing switching (solenoid control data, control time data), etc.
In the normal electric role control data setting process, the gaming state ("normal state" or "time saving state") and the type of symbol per common symbol ("symbol 1 per common symbol") determined in step S20-4 are determined. After checking, the normal power function control table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out, and the read normal power function control table is set in the normal power function control table area of the RAM 230. Here, the gaming state is determined based on the value (“0” or “1”) set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
In the normal power control data setting process, next, the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of opening/closing switching is read out. Then, the read-out switching frequency is set in the normal power switching switching frequency counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the number of ordinary winnings counter.

In step S22-5, a normal power role release pre-release time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S22-6. In the normal power role pre-release time setting process, the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined normal power role pre-release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-release state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory release preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing.
When the normal electric accessory release preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first moves to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process moves to step S23-3. The normal power opening/closing switching process will be described later. Further, "1" is set in the normal power operation flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal power opening/closing switching process)
Next, the normal power opening/closing switching processing in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be explained.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the normal power opening/closing switching process.
When the normal power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first moves to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S23-3 Or move on to S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S24-3. In the normal electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power control data setting process, the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is set. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power control time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S24-4. In the normal power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is performed by referring to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read out the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric switch opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter is newly set in the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal electric accessory release control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 46, first, the process moves to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the process moves to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]), and the value of the ordinary electric prize winning number counter If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric award winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal power release control termination processing is executed, and the process moves to step S25-6. In the normal power release control termination process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal power closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S25-7. In the normal power role closing valid time setting process, a predetermined normal power role closing valid time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Ordinary electric accessory closure effective processing)
Next, the ordinary electrically powered accessory closure validating process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory closure valid processing.
When the normal electric accessory closure validating process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 47, the process first moves to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the normal power operation flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 48, the process first moves to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be explained.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process moves to step S38-1, as shown in FIG. 49.
In step S38-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Further, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S38-3, and the game If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not a game enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-enabled state, the game It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether the on state of the out switch 109 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 is not detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not the game is in a predetermined game state. If it is determined that the game is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process moves to step S38-5, and it is determined that the game is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process moves to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which the time saving control is stopped and a jackpot gaming state is not occurring.
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether the on state of the out switch 109 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, a normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process moves to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. When it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is equal to the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the second starting port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the left winning port switch 106 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the other left winning holes 57a to 57d. Add "3". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning port switch 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the on state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added to "6", which is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the right other winning hole 59. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state of the right winning a prize opening switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8 If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process moves to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as the initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
In step S38-9, base ratio calculation processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from among the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when displaying the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "b" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "b" is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the current value is displayed by LED49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the one digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

On the other hand, if you select to display the base ratio of the previous section, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 2 to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 2 to The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "b" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "c" is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the current value is displayed by LED49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the one digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register saved in step S38-1 are The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing ends, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. This allows execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various performances executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.

(Holding performance)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) is The pending performance is executed.
A suspended performance means that the notification display (start judgment) of a special symbol based on the game information targeted for the suspended performance (hereinafter referred to as "game information subject to suspended performance") is suspended, or the suspended performance The effect is to suggest (notify) that a notification display of a special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the pending performance, a pending symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the pending performance is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 to b3.
Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, each of the four storage areas (storage area 1 to storage area 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area is set as the display position (display part) where the reserved symbol h is displayed. The corresponding display position is defined.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b3, a display position corresponding to one storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area is defined as a display position (display section) where the reserved symbol h is displayed.

In a pending performance that uses the special figure 1 game information as the target pending performance game information, a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b2.
That is, during the period in which the game information subject to pending performance is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) (after the game information subject to pending performance is acquired, the start based on the game information subject to pending performance is (during the period before execution of the determination), in the pending symbol display area b2, a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed.
At this time, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the suspended performance target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the game information subject to pending performance is stored in storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the game information subject to pending performance to the end of the notification display of special symbols based on the game information subject to pending performance In the middle), a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display area b1.

On the other hand, in a pending performance using the special figure 2 game information as the pending performance target game information, a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the game information subject to pending performance is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (storage area) (from after the game information subject to pending performance is obtained until before execution of the start determination based on the game information subject to pending performance) (during the period), a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display area b3.
On the other hand, during the period in which the game information subject to pending performance is stored in storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the game information subject to pending performance to the end of the notification display of special symbols based on the game information subject to pending performance In the middle), a pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 game information in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area, and a pending performance targeting the special figure 1 game information is executed. In this case, in response to the start of the pending performance, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the pending symbol display area b2.
Thereafter, in response to the storage area for storing the game information subject to pending performance being shifted from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, the display area of the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to pending performance is shifted from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2. is shifted from the display position corresponding to storage area 2 to the display position corresponding to storage area 2.
In addition, in response to the storage area for storing the game information subject to pending performance being shifted from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display area of the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to pending performance is shifted from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1. is shifted from the display position corresponding to storage area 1 to the display position corresponding to storage area 1.
Furthermore, in response to the storage area for storing the game information subject to pending effect being shifted from the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1) to the storage area 0, the pending symbol corresponding to the game information subject to pending effect is shifted. The display area of h is shifted from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to storage area 1) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in accordance with the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the game information subject to the pending performance, the display of the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the pending performance in the pending symbol display area b1 is terminated, thereby ending the pending performance. do.

In this embodiment, as the types of pending effects, a normal pending presentation and a pending preview presentation are defined.
The "normal pending performance" is a type of pending performance that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for the suspended performance.
In this embodiment, as the types (aspects) of the pending symbols h, normal pending and special pending are defined.
In the normal hold performance, the normal hold is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold performance target game information.
A normal hold performance is when the game information for the hold performance (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area). It is started in response to and ended in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the pending performance target game information.

(Pending notice performance)
The "pending notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance. In other words, the pending preview performance is a type of pending performance that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined game information by the aspect of the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information.
In the following explanation, the game information that is the target of the pending preview performance will be referred to as "game information subject to pending preview." Further, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending advance notice target game information is referred to as the "notice target pending symbol hy".
In the present embodiment, the pending notice performance is a performance that suggests the result of advance special symbol determination based on the pending notice target game information (specifically, a "small hit symbol,""jackpotsymbol," or "missing symbol"). It becomes.
In the reservation notice performance, a special reservation is displayed as a notice target reservation symbol hy.
In this embodiment, "blue reservation", "green reservation", "purple reservation", and "red reservation" are defined as special reservation modes (types).
In the reservation notice performance, the aspect of the notice target pending symbol hy changes, and the result of the advance judgment based on the reservation notice target game information (specifically, The possibility of winning a ``big hit'' or ``small hit'' is suggested.
Here, the winning expectations for each type of special reservation are as follows: "red reservation", "purple reservation", "green reservation", "blue reservation" (high winning expectation → winning expectation) in descending order of winning expectation. It is stipulated to have a low degree of
"Winning expectation level" is the possibility (degree) of winning a "big hit" or "small win" when the mode is selected.

When a hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers and hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. In the reservation notice performance, in response to the arrival of each reservation change opportunity, the aspect of the notice target reservation symbol hy changes according to the reservation change content corresponding to the reservation change opportunity.
The “reservation change opportunity” is an opportunity for a change in the aspect of the preview target reservation symbol hy. Moreover, the "retention change content" is the content in which the aspect of the preview target reservation symbol hy changes.
In the present embodiment, the hold change trigger is defined as the start time of the variable performance corresponding to each piece of advance hold information, the start time of the variable performance corresponding to the hold notice target game information, etc. Then, when the suspension notice effect is executed, one or more suspension change triggers are set from among these suspension change triggers.
In this embodiment, the pending notice performance is executed for only the special figure 1 game information out of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Special figure variation effect)
Next, a special figure variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "special symbol fluctuation performance" is a performance that is executed while the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner.
First, a special figure variation effect (hereinafter referred to as "first special figure variation effect") executed during the variable display of the first special symbol will be explained.
The first special pattern variation performance is a performance that suggests (pre-announces) the result of the start judgment (special pattern hit judgment, special pattern pattern judgment, special pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) related to the first special pattern variation performance. . In this embodiment, the result of the special figure hit determination (specifically, the possibility of a "big hit" or "small hit") is suggested by the first special figure variation performance. In addition, the second special figure variation performance is a production that does not suggest (notice) the result of the start judgment (special figure hit judgment, special figure pattern judgment, special figure variation pattern judgment, etc.) related to the second special figure variation effect. ing.
In the first special symbol variation production, the first production symbol z1 is displayed in a variable manner in each of the three first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second production symbol z2 is displayed in the second production symbol display area a4. Fluctuations are displayed. In particular, the second performance symbol z2 is always displayed in a variable manner in the second performance symbol display area a4 in a fixed manner during execution of the special symbol variation performance.
In the following explanation, the first performance symbol z1 displayed in the first performance symbol display area a1 is referred to as a "left symbol", and the first performance symbol z1 displayed in the first performance symbol display area a2 is referred to as a "middle symbol". , the first performance symbol z1 displayed in the first performance symbol display area a3 is defined as a "right symbol".

The first special figure variation performance is constructed by combining one or more element performances.
In this embodiment, the element performances include "normal fluctuation", "pseudo fluctuation", "tempai stirring (false)", "tempai stirring (establishment)", "reach (miss)", "reach (development)", " ``Development reach (miss)'', ``development reach (win)'', ``one shot announcement (loss)'', ``one shot announcement (win)'', ``re-lottery'', etc. are stipulated.
The first special figure variation performance is constituted by sequentially executing one or more of the above-mentioned element performances according to the selected and set performance scenario data.

"Normal variation" is an effect in which a normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3.
"Normal variable display" is a display in which the types of the first performance symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is the position where the first performance symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the special symbol stop performance.
Specifically, in the "normal variation", the normal variation display of each symbol is sequentially started in the order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

"Pseudo fluctuation" is content in which a temporary stop display of the first special symbol z1 is executed after a normal variable display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is a performance of.
The "temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the temporary stop display is a display in which the first performance symbol z1 of one type remains in a state of moving in a predetermined manner (oscillation, rotation, etc.) at the lottery result display position.
The "stop display" is a display in which the first performance symbol z1 of one type remains in a stopped state at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in "pseudo fluctuation", after the normal fluctuation display of each symbol starts in the order of left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol, temporary stop display of each symbol in the order of left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol. is executed.
In particular, in each "pseudo fluctuation", the combinations of the first effect symbols z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are "missing eyes,""reachingeyes," and "chance eyes." and "REG pattern".
A "mismatch" is a combination (specifically, a combination in which the types of left, middle, and right symbols are not the same) that is not included in the winning symbols (in this embodiment, "REG symbols"). (excluding certain combinations described below).
The "reach eye" is a combination included in the "REG symbol" (specifically, a combination in which the types of left symbol and right symbol are the same).
"Chance" is a specific combination (for example, "1, 2, 3).

"Tenpai agitation (gase)" is a production in which, after inciting whether or not a reach state will be established, the content is such that a reach state will not be established.
The "reach state" means that the first production symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two of the three first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the first production symbol z1 that is temporarily stopped is displayed. The combination of the effect symbols z1 is in a state where it is a combination included in the "REG symbols" (a state in which a "reach" is established). In this embodiment, first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, thereby forming a ready-to-reach state. Note that during the period when the ready-to-win state is formed, the normal fluctuation display continues for the medium symbols.
Specifically, in "Tenpai Inciting (Gase)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, in the first effect symbol display area a3, the right symbol of the same type as the right symbol that is being temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed. After the right symbol that appears appears and displays content that prompts whether or not it will be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right symbol that appears disappears (passes the lottery result display position) without being temporarily displayed. Display is executed. At this time, a tenpai inciting image is displayed while displaying content that incites whether or not the right symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed.
As a result, "Tenpai Inciting (Gase)" becomes a performance that does not create a ready-to-reach state.

“Tenpai inciting (establishment)” is a production in which the reach state is established after inciting whether or not the reach state is established.
Specifically, in "Tenpai inciting (establishment)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, in the first effect symbol display area a3, the right symbol of the same type as the right symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed. After the right symbol that has appeared is displayed as a temporary stop display or not, the right symbol that has appeared is displayed as a temporary stop display and a content that creates a reach state is displayed. . At this time, a tenpai inciting image is displayed while displaying content that incites whether or not the right symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed.
As a result, "Tenpai inciting (establishment)" becomes an effect that creates a ready-to-reach state.

"Reach (miss)" is a production that is executed during the formation of a reach state, and is a production that avoids the establishment of the "REG symbol" after inciting whether or not the "REG symbol" will be established. It becomes.
Specifically, in "reach", after the reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, the middle symbol of a different type from the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed.
The "reach performance image" is a performance image that encourages the temporary stop display of the middle symbols of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol (that the "REG symbol" is established).

"Reach (Development)" is a production that is executed during the formation of a reach state, and is a production that avoids the establishment of the "REG symbol" after inciting whether or not the "REG symbol" will be established. is executed, after which the fluctuating display of the medium symbol is restarted, and thereafter, the content is such that the ready-to-reach state progresses to the developed ready-to-reach state.
The "developed ready-to-reach state" is a state in which the two first special symbols z1 forming the ready-to-reach state are displayed in a reduced size. In this embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol forming the ready-to-reach state are reduced and displayed at the upper end of the display screen 31, thereby forming the developed ready-to-reach state. In addition, during the period when the developed reach state is formed, the medium symbol will not be displayed.
Specifically, in "Reach (Development)", after the reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol are forming the reach state, the middle symbol of a different type from the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed. The display is temporarily stopped, and then the fluctuating display of the medium symbol is restarted, and then a developed reach state is formed.

"Development Reach (Outside)" is a performance that is executed following "Reach (Development)." In other words, "Developed reach (miss)" is a performance that is executed during the formation of a developed reach state, and is a content that misses the establishment of the "REG symbol" after inciting whether or not the "REG symbol" will be established. It is a performance of.
Specifically, in "Developed reach (missing)", after the developed reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the developed reach state, a different type from the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed. The middle symbol is displayed temporarily.
The "developed reach performance image" is a performance image that encourages the temporary stop display of the same type of middle symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol (that the "REG symbol" is established).

"Development reach (hit)" is a performance that is executed following "reach (development)". In other words, "Developed reach (win)" is a performance that is executed during the formation of the developed reach state, and after inciting whether or not the "REG symbol" will be established, the "REG symbol" will be established. It is staged.
Specifically, in "Developed reach (hit)", after the developed reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the developed reach state, the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol The middle symbol will be displayed temporarily.

The "Ippatsu Announcement"("Ichitsu Announcement (miss)"/"Ichitsu Announcement (Win)") is a performance that is performed following the "Tenpai Inciting (Establishment)". In other words, "one shot announcement"("one shot announcement (miss)", "one shot announcement (win)") is a performance that is executed while a reach state is formed, and is performed in response to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b. The content is to suggest (notify) whether or not the "REG symbol" will be realized (whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won).
While the "one shot notification"("one shot notification (miss)"/"one shot notification (win)") is being executed, an operation validity period is set. During the valid operation period, the pressing operation of the production button 5b is valid. On the other hand, the pressing operation of the production button 5b is invalidated outside the valid operation period.
In the case of "one shot notification"("one shot notification (miss)", "one shot notification (win)"), the operation validity period starts according to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start. Then, the predetermined valid time has passed since the start of the valid operation period, and the number of times the pressing operation of the production button 5b has been detected has reached the predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). , the operation validity period ends in response to the establishment of any of the conditions.
In the case of "one shot notification"("one shot notification (miss)"/"one shot notification (hit)"), when the operation validity period ends (the elapse of the predetermined validity period or the detection of the pressing operation of the production button 5b) In response, a notification image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
The "notification image" is a performance image that suggests (notifies) whether or not the "REG symbol" will be established (whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won).
In particular, in the "one-shot notification (win)", a "notification image (win)" with content suggesting (notifying) that the "REG symbol" is established (winning) is displayed as the notification image.
On the other hand, in the "one shot notification (miss)", a "notice image (miss)" with content suggesting (notifying) that the "REG symbol" is not established (failed) is displayed as the notification image.

The "re-lottery" is a performance that is executed following the establishment of a "REG symbol"("pseudofluctuation","developed reach (hit)", "one shot announcement", etc.). The "re-lottery" is a performance that stimulates whether or not the established "REG symbol" will be promoted to a "BIG symbol." At this time, the "re-lottery" is for presentation purposes and is not an actual lottery.
In this embodiment, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information is a win ("big hit" or "small hit"), the last A "re-lottery" is always performed as an elemental performance. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information is "miss", the "REG symbol" will not be established, so the "re-lottery" will not be executed.
Specifically, the "re-lottery" is executed during the period when the "REG symbol" is established (temporarily stopped display). In the "re-lottery", a re-lottery image is displayed on the display screen 31a during a period when the "REG symbol" is established (temporarily stopped display).
The "re-lottery image" is a performance image that stimulates whether or not the "REG symbol" will be promoted to the "BIG symbol." The re-lottery image according to the present embodiment is a performance image depicting a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. Particularly, when the result of the special pattern determination is "BIG bonus", a re-lottery image in which an ally character wins over an enemy character is displayed as a re-lottery image. On the other hand, when the result of the special pattern determination is "REG bonus", a re-lottery image in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is displayed as a re-lottery image.

Next, a special figure variation effect (hereinafter referred to as "second special figure variation effect") executed during the variable display of the second special symbol will be explained.
The second special symbol variation performance consists only of mini symbol variation displays. That is, the second special figure variation performance does not include the above element performance.
The "mini symbol variation display" is a variation display using the first effect symbol z1 (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) that is reduced in size compared to the normal variation display.
In this embodiment, during the period (hereinafter referred to as the "bonus period") from the start of the first bonus set to the end of the final bonus set (initial bonus set or continuous bonus set), ” is executed. As a result, multiple "bonuses" included during the bonus period are presented as a series of "bonuses."
Therefore, during the variable display of the second special symbol each time, the "BIG bonus performance" started in response to the "first hit" will continue to be executed.
Therefore, by executing only the mini figure variation display as the second special figure variation effect, the "BIG bonus effect" is prevented from being inhibited. It should be noted that during the bonus period, the main preview performance, which will be described later, will not be executed.

(Special stop performance)
Next, a special figure stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "special pattern stop performance" is a performance that is executed while the special pattern is stopped and displayed.
In the special pattern stop effect executed while the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, the first effect pattern z1 is stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect pattern is displayed. In the area a4, the second performance symbol z2 is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, the special symbol stop effect executed during the stop display of the second special symbol consists of only the "mini symbol stop display". The "mini symbol stop display" is a stop display using the first effect symbols z1 (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) that are reduced in size compared to the normal variable display.

(Main preview performance)
Next, the main preview effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "main notice performance" is a performance that is executed during the first special pattern variation performance, and is the start judgment (special pattern hit judgment, special pattern pattern judgment, special pattern variation pattern judgment) related to the first special pattern variation performance. etc.) is a performance that suggests the result. Note that the main preview performance is not executed during the second special figure variation performance.
In the present embodiment, the main preview performance suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of a "jackpot symbol" or a "small win symbol").
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types with different presentation contents are defined as the main preview presentation types. Then, the type of the main notice performance to be executed during the first special figure variation performance is selected according to the contents of the element performances constituting the first special figure variation performance.

(Winning performance)
Next, a winning effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The winning performance is a performance executed during the "bonus" (small win game state/jackpot game state).
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a "BIG bonus effect" is executed during the bonus period.
The "BIG bonus performance" is a performance that suggests (notifies) that the bonus period is in progress.
Here, the "bonus period" is the period from the start of the "first win" to the end of the remaining pending bonus related to the "REG bonus". Therefore, in response to the start of the "first hit", the "BIG bonus performance" is started, and in response to the end of the remaining pending bonus related to the "REG bonus", the "BIG bonus performance" is ended. During the bonus period, the "BIG bonus performance" continues during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the occurrence of the small winning gaming state, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the stop display of the second special symbol, etc. Ru.
At this time, during the bonus period, the more times you perform V-evasion attacks, the longer the bonus period becomes, and as a result, you will be able to watch the "BIG bonus performance" for a longer time (up to the scene near the final stage). .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "REG bonus" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, the "REG bonus performance" is executed during the bonus (small win game state/big win game state).
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested in the "REB bonus effect".
Specifically, in the "REB bonus effect", a character card appears on the display screen 31a at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a predetermined round). Then, the value (setting value) set in the setting value area is suggested depending on the type of character card that has appeared.
In this embodiment, the types of character cards are defined as "character A card,""character B card,""character C card," and "character D card."
The high expectations for each type of character card are listed in descending order of expectations: "Character A card,""Character B card,""Character C card," and "Character D card (high expectations)." It is specified that the waiting level is high → high setting waiting level is low).
"High setting expectation" is the probability (degree) that the value set in the setting value area will be a high setting value (for example, a value of "4" or more) when a character card of the relevant type appears. It has become.
This allows the player to predict the value (setting value) set in the setting value area based on the type of character card that has appeared.

(Customer waiting performance)
Next, a customer waiting effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The customer waiting performance is a performance executed while the customer is waiting.
The "customer waiting state" is a state in which special games (fluctuating display/stop display of special symbols, small win game state, and jackpot game state) are not being executed. In this embodiment, a customer waiting state is started in response to reception of a demo designation command. In addition, in response to receiving a hold number designation command that specifies an increase in the number of holds while in the customer waiting state (detection of entry of game balls into the starting ports 51 and 52, acquisition of special map game information), the customer waiting state is is terminated.
The customer waiting performance is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, and is ended when the customer waiting state ends.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested in the customer waiting performance. At this time, in the customer waiting performance, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested using a method different from the "REG bonus performance".

Specifically, while the customer waiting effect is being executed, the customer waiting effect screen is displayed on the display screen 31a. Then, on the customer waiting production screen, there is information that indirectly suggests the number of consecutive hits within 100G, information that indirectly suggests the BIG bonus ratio, information that indirectly suggests the number of balls acquired during the BIG bonus, and total number of rotations. Information that indirectly suggests the jackpot probability, information that indirectly suggests the jackpot probability, etc. are displayed. This allows the player to predict the value (setting value) set in the setting value area based on the displayed various information.
The "number of consecutive wins in 100G" is the number of times a "big hit" or "small win" was won out of the past 100 [times] of special symbol drawings. This indirectly suggests that the larger the "number of consecutive hits within 100G" is, the larger the value set in the set value area is.
The "number of balls won during the BIG bonus" is the average number of prize balls obtained during one [time] of the "BIG bonus". The higher the "Number of balls acquired during BIG bonus", the more it suggests that good players were playing in the past (skilled players predicted that the setting would be high and continued playing), and as a result , it is indirectly suggested that the value set in the setting value area is a large value.
The "total number of rotations" is the total number of special symbol drawings executed on the day. The higher the "total number of rotations," the more it suggests that a long game (operation) was executed in the past (the player predicted that the setting would be high and a long game was executed). As a result, it is indirectly suggested that the value set in the setting value area is a large value.
Note that for the "BIG bonus ratio" and "jackpot probability", the values set in the set value area are relatively directly suggested.

(About production mode)
Next, the production mode selected and set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to the performance mode A. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to the performance mode B. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special symbol fluctuation performance corresponding to the performance mode C.
In the pachinko machine 1, three types of performance modes (``performance mode A'' to ``performance mode C'') are defined, and the player can select one of the three types of performance modes. It is possible to set. Then, the modes of various performances become modes according to the selected and set production mode.

Specifically, the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is provided with a performance mode flag area. Information specifying the selected performance mode is set (stored) in the performance mode flag area.
In this embodiment, aspects such as a hold effect, a hold notice effect, a first special figure variation effect, a special figure stop effect, a main notice effect, a first effect symbol z1, a background image, an interface image, etc. are selected and set effects. The mode depends on the mode. On the other hand, aspects such as the second special figure variation effect, the winning effect, and the customer waiting effect are common to all the effect modes.
The "interface image" is an image that decorates the periphery of the effect pattern display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, the interface image is an image that defines the position where the first effect symbol z1 is displayed, the position where the pending symbol h is displayed, and the like.
The "background image" is an image that becomes the background of the first effect pattern z1.
In particular, in "Production Mode A" to "Production Mode C", pending production, pending preview production, first special figure variation production, special figure stop production, main notice production, first production pattern z1, background image, interface image, etc. Since the aspects of the pachinko machines 1 are greatly different, by changing the performance mode in one pachinko machine 1, it is possible to give the player the impression that he or she is playing on a different model.

That is, in the present embodiment, modes corresponding to each of "presentation mode A" to "presentation mode C" are defined as modes of the suspended presentation (specifically, presentation scenario data). When the suspended performance is executed, a mode corresponding to the set performance mode is selected and set as the mode of the suspended performance. As a result, a suspended performance in a mode corresponding to the set performance mode is executed. At this time, in this embodiment, the scenario of the pending performance, the aspect of the pending symbol h, etc. change depending on the set performance mode.
Further, as the mode of the pending preview performance (specifically, the performance scenario data), modes corresponding to each of "performance mode A" to "performance mode C" are defined. When the pending preview performance is executed, a mode corresponding to the set performance mode is selected and set as the mode of the pending preview performance. As a result, a pending notice performance in a mode corresponding to the set performance mode is executed. At this time, in the present embodiment, the scenario of the pending notice performance, the aspect of the pending notice target symbol hy, etc. change depending on the set performance mode.

In addition, as the mode of the first special figure variation effect (specifically, the effect scenario data), modes corresponding to each of "presentation mode A" to "presentation mode C" are defined. When the first special figure variation performance is executed, a mode corresponding to the set production mode is selected and set as the mode of the first special figure variation production. As a result, the first special figure variation performance is executed in a mode corresponding to the set performance mode. At this time, in this embodiment, the scenario of the first special symbol variation production, the mode (type) of the first production pattern z1, the mode (type) of the background image of the first production pattern z1, the mode (type) of the element production, etc. changes depending on the set production mode.
Here, as mentioned above, depending on the combination of the variation mode number specified by the variation mode specification command and the variation pattern number specified by the variation pattern specification command (hereinafter referred to as "variable scale pattern"), Scenario data is selected. The first special figure variation performance is constructed by sequentially executing one or more element performances according to the selected performance scenario data.
In particular, in this embodiment, for all the variable scale patterns, the production scenario data corresponding to each variable scale pattern is production scenario data corresponding to "production mode A" and production scenario data corresponding to "production mode B". and presentation scenario data corresponding to “performance mode C”. Furthermore, element performances corresponding to each of "performance mode A" to "performance mode C" are defined.
In the performance scenario data corresponding to "performance mode A", the first special figure variation performance is constructed only from the element performances corresponding to "performance mode A" (excluding the mode transition preview performance described later).
On the other hand, in the performance scenario data corresponding to "performance mode B", the first special figure variation performance is constructed only from the element performances corresponding to "performance mode B" (excluding the mode transition preview performance described later).
On the other hand, in the performance scenario data corresponding to "performance mode C", the first special figure variation performance is constructed only from the element performances corresponding to "performance mode C" (excluding the mode transition preview performance described later).

In detail, in this embodiment, the element productions corresponding to "production mode A" are "normal fluctuation A", "tempai agitation (gase) A", "tempai agitation (established) A", and "reach (miss) A". ", "Reach (development)", "Development reach (miss) A1" - "Development reach (miss) A5", "Development reach (hit) A1" - "Development reach (hit) A5", "Re-lottery A1" ~ “Re-lottery A5” etc. are stipulated. The first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "performance mode A" is configured by combining one or more of these element performances.
In particular, in the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "performance mode A", "pseudo variation", "one shot announcement (miss)", "one shot announcement (hit)", etc. are not executed.
As a result, in the first special figure variation performance corresponding to "performance mode A", the performance content mainly progresses in the following first to fourth flows. Note that the first to third flows are selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a failure (“miss”). On the other hand, the fourth flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a win ("big hit" or "small win").
As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the first flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation A" is first executed, and then "tenpai stirring (gase) A" is executed. This is executed, and the first special figure fluctuation performance ends when the "Tenpai Agitation (Gase) A" ends.
As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the second flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation A" is first executed, and then "tenpai inciting (establishment) A" is executed. After that, "reach (missing) A" is executed, and the first special symbol variation effect ends with the end of "reach (missing) A".
As shown in FIG. 57(c), in the third flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation A" is first executed, and then "tenpai inciting (establishment) A" is executed. is executed, then "Reach (development)" is executed, and then any one of "Development Reach (Outside)" from "Development Reach (Outside) A1" to "Development Reach (Outside) A5" is executed. , With the end of the "developmental reach", the first special figure variation effect ends.
As shown in FIG. 57(d), in the fourth flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation A" is first executed, and then "Tenpai inciting (establishment) A" is executed. is executed, then "reach (development)" is executed, and then any "development reach (win)" among "development reach (win) A1" to "development reach (win) A5" is executed. After that, one of the "re-lotteries" among "re-lotteries A1" to "re-lotteries A5" is executed, and when the "re-lotteries" are finished, the first special drawing variation effect ends.
As described above, in the first special figure variation performance corresponding to "performance mode A", the main questions are whether or not it will develop into a "development reach" (development reach production image), and the "development reach" that will develop after the "reach (development)". ” (Advanced reach performance image) and based on the type, the content of the performance will arouse the player's expectations.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the element productions corresponding to "production mode B" are "normal fluctuation B", "tempai stirring (false) B1" to "tempai stirring (false) B5", "tempai stirring (established) B1" ” to “Tenpai incitement (established) B5,” “one shot announcement (miss),” “one shot announcement (win),” “re-lottery B1” to “re-lottery B5,” etc. are defined. The first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "performance mode B" is configured by combining one or more of these element performances.
In particular, in the first special figure variation production corresponding to "Production Mode B", "Pseudo variation", "Reach (miss)", "Reach (development)", "Development reach (miss)", "Development reach (hit)")" etc. are never executed.
As a result, the first special figure variation performance corresponding to "performance mode B" mainly progresses in the following first to third flows. Note that the first and second flows are selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a failure (“miss”). On the other hand, the third flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a win ("big hit" or "small win").
As shown in FIG. 58(a), in the first flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation B" is first executed, and then "Tenpai agitation (gase) B1" ~ Among the "Tenpai stirring (gase) B5", any one of the "Tenpai stirring (gase)" is executed, and when the "Tenpai stirring (gase)" ends, the first special symbol fluctuation performance ends.
As shown in FIG. 58(b), in the second flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "normal variation B" is first executed, and then "Tenpai inciting (establishment) B1" ~ Among the "Tenpai incitement (established) B5", any "Tenpai incitement (established)" is executed, and then "One-shot announcement (miss)" is executed, and the "One-shot announcement (miss)" ends. As a result, the first special figure variation performance ends.
As shown in FIG. 58(c), in the third flow, in response to the start of the first special symbol variation effect, "Normal variation B" is first executed, and then "Tenpai inciting (establishment) B1" ~ Among the "Tenpai incitement (established) B5", any "Tenpai incitement (established)" is executed, then "One shot announcement (win)" is executed, and then "Re-lottery B1" ~ "Re-lottery"B5'', one of the ``re-lotteries'' is executed, and when the ``re-lotteries'' are finished, the first special symbol fluctuation performance ends.
As described above, in the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "Production Mode B", mainly based on whether or not tenpai (reaching eye) is established and the content of the "one shot announcement" (announcement image), The content of the performance will arouse the expectations of the players.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, "pseudo fluctuation", "re-lottery C1" to "re-lottery C5", etc. are defined as element performances corresponding to "presentation mode C". The first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "performance mode C" is configured by combining one or more of these element performances.
In particular, in the first special figure variation production corresponding to "Production Mode C", "Normal variation", "Tenpai agitation (gase)", "Tenpai agitation (establishment)", "Reach (miss)", "Reach (development)")","Developed reach (miss)", "Developed reach (hit)", "One shot announcement (miss)", "One shot announcement (hit)", etc. are never executed.
As a result, the first special figure fluctuation performance corresponding to "performance mode C" is mainly composed of multiple "pseudo fluctuations", and includes "missing eyes,""reachingeyes," and "chance eyes." Or the temporary stop display of "REG symbols" continues at a good tempo.
Specifically, in the first special figure variation performance corresponding to "performance mode C", the performance content progresses in the following first or second flow. Note that the first flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a failure ("missing"). On the other hand, the second flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a win ("big hit" or "small win").
As shown in FIG. 59(a), in the first flow, multiple "pseudo fluctuations" are repeatedly executed in response to the start of the first special symbol fluctuation effect, and in the final "pseudo fluctuation", " The "missing eye" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and thereby the first special figure variation effect ends.
As shown in FIG. 59(b), in the second flow, multiple "pseudo fluctuations" are repeatedly executed in response to the start of the first special symbol fluctuation effect, and in the final "pseudo fluctuation", ""REGsymbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then one of the "re-lotteries" from "re-lottery C1" to "re-lottery C5" is executed, and when the "re-lottery" ends, the first special symbol change The performance ends.
As described above, in the first special symbol variation performance corresponding to "performance mode C", the content of the performance is such that the player's expectations are aroused mainly based on whether or not the chance number and reach number are established. At this time, the expectation of winning is improved by successive successive "reach moves" and "chance moves".

Further, in this embodiment, as the mode of the first special figure stop production (specifically, production scenario data), modes corresponding to each of "Production Mode A" to "Production Mode C" are defined. When the first special figure stop performance is executed, a mode corresponding to the set performance mode is selected and set as the mode of the first special figure stop effect. As a result, the first special figure stop performance is executed in a mode corresponding to the set performance mode. At this time, in this embodiment, the aspect of the first effect pattern z1, the aspect of the background image of the first effect pattern z1, etc. change depending on the set effect mode.
Further, as the type of main preview performance (specifically, performance scenario data), types corresponding to each of "performance mode A" to "performance mode C" are defined. When the main preview performance is executed, the main preview performance of the type corresponding to the set performance mode is executed (excluding when a mode transition preview performance described later is executed).

(About selection of production mode)
Next, selection of the production mode in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing screen transitions during the customer waiting state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the production mode selection screen.
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 starts waiting for a customer in response to receiving the demonstration designation command. At the start of the customer waiting state, the game screen (specifically, the screen that was being displayed when the game was interrupted) is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the gaming screen to the customer waiting effect screen.
Furthermore, in response to detection of a press operation of the up key button while the customer waiting performance screen is being displayed, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the customer waiting performance screen to the performance mode selection screen.
On the other hand, in response to receiving a hold number designation command that specifies an increase in the hold number while the customer waiting production screen is displayed (detection of game balls entering the starting ports 51, 52, acquisition of special figure game information), The display on the display screen 31a shifts from the customer waiting performance screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen at the start of the variable display of special symbols based on the acquired special symbol game information).
Further, in response to detection of a press operation of the down key button (back button) while the performance mode selection screen is being displayed, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the performance mode selection screen to the customer waiting performance screen.
On the other hand, in response to detection of a pressing operation of the production button 5b (decision button) while the production mode selection screen is displayed, playback of a mode decision voice, which will be described later, is started, and upon completion of the playback of the mode decision voice, the display The display on the screen 31a shifts from the performance mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen that was being displayed when the game was interrupted).
On the other hand, in response to receiving a pending number designation command that specifies an increase in the pending number while displaying the production mode selection screen (detecting the entry of game balls into the starting ports 51 and 52 and acquiring special figure game information), The display on the display screen 31a shifts from the performance mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen at the start of the variable display of special symbols based on the acquired special symbol game information).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the performance mode can be selected and changed while the performance mode selection screen is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 61, a production mode explanation image g is displayed on the production mode selection screen.
The performance mode explanation image g is an image that explains the content (characteristics/outline) of the performance corresponding to the performance mode that is the selection target.
In this embodiment, the production mode explanation image g includes a production mode explanation image A corresponding to production mode A, a production mode explanation image B corresponding to production mode B, and a production mode explanation image C corresponding to production mode C. , is specified.
Production mode explanation image A displays the mode name of production mode A, displays information explaining the content (features/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode A, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode A. Displaying the profile of character A.
Production mode explanation image B displays the mode name of production mode B, displays information explaining the content (features/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode B, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode B. Displaying the profile of character B.
The production mode explanation image C displays the mode name of production mode C, displays information explaining the content (characteristics/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode C, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode C. Displaying the profile of character C.
Further, information explaining various operation methods is displayed on the production mode selection screen.
In this embodiment, on the production mode selection screen, information explaining that pressing the down key button will return to the customer waiting production screen, and pressing the left and right key buttons will change the production mode to be selected. Information explaining that the production mode to be selected is determined (set/confirmed) by pressing the production button 5b, etc. are displayed.

At the time of transition to the performance mode selection screen, a performance mode explanation image g corresponding to the information set in the performance mode flag area of the DRAM 304 (performance mode being set) is displayed on the performance mode selection screen.
While the production mode selection screen is displayed, each time a press operation of the left or right key button is detected, the production mode to be selected is changed, and the production mode displayed on the production mode selection screen is changed. The type of explanatory image g is changed. At this time, a performance mode explanation image g corresponding to the performance mode to be selected is displayed on the performance mode selection screen.
For example, each time a pressing operation of the right key button is detected, the production mode to be selected is changed in the order of production mode A, production mode B, production mode C, production mode A, etc. The type of the production mode explanation image g displayed on the production mode selection screen is changed in the order of production mode explanation image A, production mode explanation image B, production mode explanation image C, production mode explanation image A, . . .
Similarly, each time a press operation of the left key button is detected, the selected production mode is changed in the order of production mode C, production mode B, production mode A, production mode C, etc. , the type of the production mode explanation image g displayed on the production mode selection screen is changed in the order of production mode explanation image C, production mode explanation image B, production mode explanation image A, production mode explanation image C, and so on.

Then, when a pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected while the production mode selection screen is being displayed, the selection of the production mode to be selected is determined (confirmed) in response to this, and the selection is determined. Information specifying the production mode is set in the production mode flag area of the DRAM 304.
That is, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected in a state where production mode A is selected (a state where production mode explanation image A is displayed on the production mode selection screen), the production is Information specifying mode A is set in the effect mode flag area of DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected in a state where production mode B is selected (a state where production mode explanation image B is displayed on the production mode selection screen), the production Information specifying mode B is set in the effect mode flag area of DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected in a state where production mode C is selected (a state where production mode explanation image C is displayed on the production mode selection screen), the production Information specifying mode C is set in the effect mode flag area of DRAM 304.
With the above, the player can select and change the performance mode while the performance mode selection screen is being displayed.

(Sound production performed while the production mode selection screen is displayed)
Next, the sound effects executed while the effect mode selection screen is displayed will be explained.
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the data structure of the mode explanation voice. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the data structure of the mode decision voice. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the transition of sound production when a press operation of various buttons is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the transition of the sound production when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice or the mode determination voice.
In the pachinko machine 1, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, various sound productions (mode explanatory voices to be described later) are performed in response to detection of press operations of various buttons (left/right key buttons, down key button, production button 5b). playback, playback of a mode decision voice (described later), reproduction of button sound effect c (described later), etc.) are executed.

(Mode explanation voice)
First, the mode explanation voice will be explained.
While the production mode selection screen is displayed, a mode explanation voice is played (output) every time a press operation of a left or right key button (selection button) is detected. At this time, playback of the mode explanation voice is started in response to detection of a pressing operation of the left/right key button (selection button).
That is, as described above, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, each time a press operation of the left or right key button is detected, the production mode to be selected is changed, and the production mode selection screen The type of production mode explanation image g displayed in is changed.
At this time, as the performance mode to be selected is changed, a mode explanation voice corresponding to the changed performance mode is played back (output). In other words, as the type of production mode explanation image g displayed on the production mode screen is changed, a mode explanation voice corresponding to the type of production mode explanation image g after the change is played back (output).

The "mode explanation voice" is a production sound (sound production) that suggests (informs) the production mode to be selected. The mode explanation voice is composed of a predetermined production length (production time and production length). In this embodiment, 15.0 [s] is specified as the production length of the mode explanation voice. The mode explanation voice includes a button sound effect and a mode explanation voice.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode explanation voice is configured by combining the button sound effect and the mode explanation voice as one (series) of voice data. At this time, the mode explanation voice is configured such that a button sound effect is first played, and after the button sound effect is finished playing, the mode explanation voice is played back.
Here, if the button sound effects and mode explanation sounds are configured as separate audio data, in order to play the button sound effects and mode explanation sounds, it is necessary to register the button sound effects and mode explanation sounds in separate tracks. The number of tracks required for playback increases.
Therefore, by configuring the button sound effects and mode explanation sounds as one piece of audio data, when playing the button sound effects and mode explanation sounds, it is sufficient to register them in one track, which reduces the number of tracks required for playback. This makes it possible to suppress the increase.
The "button sound effect" is a sound effect (SE) indicating that a press operation of the left/right key button (selection button) has been detected.
The "mode explanation sound" is a sound (voice) that explains information regarding the production mode to be selected. Specifically, the mode explanation audio includes the mode name of the production mode to be selected, the contents (features/outline) of the production corresponding to the production mode to be selected, and the information corresponding to the production mode to be selected. Information regarding the profile of the character who appears as the main character in the production is explained by the voice of the character corresponding to the production mode that is selected.
In this embodiment, mode explanation voices include mode explanation voice A corresponding to production mode A (production mode explanation image A), mode explanation voice B corresponding to production mode B (production mode explanation image B), and production mode A mode explanation voice C corresponding to C (production mode explanation image C) is defined.

Mode explanation voice A, mode explanation voice B, and mode explanation voice C have the same button sound effect content, but different mode explanation voice content.
That is, the contents of the button sound effects included in mode explanation voice A, the contents of the button sound effects included in mode explanation voice B, and the contents of the button sound effects included in mode explanation voice C are the same. . In this embodiment, mode explanation voice A, mode explanation voice B, and mode explanation voice C include button sound effect a as a button sound effect. Here, button sound effect a, button sound effect b, which will be described later, and button sound effect c, which will be described later, have different contents (sound effects) from each other.
On the other hand, the content of the mode explanation voice included in the mode explanation voice A, the content of the mode explanation voice included in the mode explanation voice B, and the content of the mode explanation voice included in the mode explanation voice C are different from each other. In this embodiment, mode explanation voice A includes mode explanation voice a as mode explanation voice. On the other hand, mode explanation voice B includes mode explanation voice b as mode explanation voice. On the other hand, mode explanation voice C includes mode explanation voice c as mode explanation voice.
Mode explanation voice a provides information about the mode name of production mode A, the content (features/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode A, character A who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode A, etc. The explanation is provided by voice.
Mode explanation voice b provides information about the mode name of production mode B, the content (features/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode B, character B who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode B, etc. The explanation is provided by voice.
Mode explanation voice c provides information about the mode name of production mode C, the content (features/outline) of the production corresponding to production mode C, character C who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode C, etc. The explanation is provided by voice.

Then, in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the left/right key button, if production mode A is selected (if production mode explanation image A is displayed), a mode explanation voice is Playback of A begins.
On the other hand, if production mode B is selected as a selection target (when production mode explanation image B is displayed) in response to the detection of a press operation of the left or right key button, a mode explanation voice is displayed in response to the detection. Playback of B begins.
On the other hand, if production mode C is selected (if production mode explanation image B is displayed) in response to detection of a press operation of the left or right key button, mode explanation voice Playback of C is started.

(mode decision voice)
Next, the mode decision voice will be explained.
While the performance mode selection screen is being displayed, reproduction of the mode determination voice is started in response to detection of a pressing operation of the performance button 5b.
That is, as described above, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the selection of the production mode to be selected is determined (confirmed), and the production mode is selected. The specified information is set in the production mode flag area of the DRAM 304.
At this time, with the selection of the performance mode to be selected, a mode determination voice corresponding to the determined performance mode is reproduced (output).

The "mode decision voice" is a production sound (sound production) that indicates that the selection of production mode has been decided (confirmed) and suggests (informs) the determined production mode. The mode decision voice is composed of a predetermined production length (production time and production length). Here, the duration of the mode decision voice is set to be shorter than the duration of the mode explanation voice. In this embodiment, 5.0 [s] is specified as the production length of the mode decision voice. The mode decision voice includes a button sound effect and a mode decision voice.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 63, the mode decision voice is configured by combining the button sound effect and the mode decision voice as a single (series) of voice data. At this time, the mode decision voice is configured such that a button sound effect is first played, and after the button sound effect is finished playing, the mode decision sound is played back. As a result, just like the mode explanation voice, when playing button sound effects and mode decision voices, it is sufficient to register them in one track, which makes it possible to suppress the increase in the number of tracks required for playback. Become.
The "button sound effect" is a sound effect (SE) indicating that a pressing operation of the production button 5b (decision button) has been detected.
The "mode determination voice" is a voice related to the determined production mode. Specifically, in the mode determining voice, the lines of a character who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to the determined production mode are uttered by the voice of the character. As a result, the determined production mode is indirectly suggested (notified).
In this embodiment, mode deciding voices A, mode deciding voice A corresponding to production mode A, mode deciding voice B corresponding to production mode B, and mode deciding voice C corresponding to production mode C are defined as mode deciding voices. There is.

The mode determining voice A, the mode determining voice B, and the mode determining voice C have the same button sound effect content and different mode determining voice content.
That is, the content of the button sound effect included in mode decision voice A, the content of the button sound effect included in mode decision voice B, and the content of the button sound effect included in mode decision voice C are the same. . In this embodiment, mode determining voice A, mode determining voice B, and mode determining voice C include button sound effect b as a button sound effect.
On the other hand, the content of the mode deciding voice included in mode deciding voice A, the content of the mode deciding voice included in mode deciding voice B, and the content of the mode deciding voice included in mode deciding voice C are different from each other. In this embodiment, the mode determining voice A includes the mode determining voice a as the mode determining voice. On the other hand, mode determining voice B includes mode determining voice b as a mode determining voice. On the other hand, the mode determining voice C includes a mode determining voice c as a mode determining voice.
The mode determining sound a is a sound in which the character A's lines corresponding to the production mode A are uttered by the character A's voice.
The mode determining sound b is a sound in which the character B's lines corresponding to the production mode B are uttered by the character B's voice.
The mode determining sound c is a sound in which the character C's lines corresponding to the production mode C are uttered by the character C's voice.

When the selection of the production mode A is determined in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the production button 5b, the reproduction of the mode determination voice A is started in response to the detection.
On the other hand, when the selection of production mode B is determined in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the production button 5b, reproduction of the mode determination voice B is started in response to the detection.
On the other hand, when the selection of the production mode C is determined in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the production button 5b, reproduction of the mode determination voice C is started in response to the detection.

(Button sound effect c)
Next, button sound effect c will be explained.
While the production mode selection screen is being displayed, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is started in response to detection of a press operation of the down key button.
That is, as described above, while the performance mode selection screen is displayed, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the performance mode selection screen to the customer waiting performance screen in response to detection of a press operation of the down key button (back button). Transition.
At this time, button sound effect c is played (output) as the production mode selection screen shifts to the customer waiting production screen.
The "button sound effect c" is a production sound (sound production) composed of a predetermined production length (production time and production length). The duration of the button sound effect c is shorter than the duration of the mode decision voice. In this embodiment, 1.0 [s] is specified as the duration of the button sound effect c.
The button sound effect c is a sound effect (SE) indicating that a pressing operation of the down key button (back button) has been detected.

(About the transition of sound production)
Next, the transition of sound effects will be explained.
As mentioned above, the mode explanation voice is composed of a performance duration of 15.0 [s]. As a result, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is completed (ended) after 15.0 [s] have elapsed from the start.
In particular, if a press operation of any of the various buttons is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted (ended/stopped) in response.

That is, when a pressing operation of the left/right key button (selection button) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted in response.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to track x and reproduced by that track x.
Here, as mentioned above, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the production mode to be selected is changed according to the detection of the press operation of the left/right key button, and the production mode after the change is changed. Playback of the mode explanation voice corresponding to the mode is started.
At this time, if a press operation of the left or right key button is detected while the first mode explanation voice is being played back by track x, the information registered in track x will be changed to the first mode. The information specifying reproduction of the explanatory voice is replaced (overwritten) with information specifying reproduction of the second mode explanatory voice corresponding to the changed production mode.
As a result, when a left/right key button press operation is detected while playing the first mode explanation voice, the playback of the first mode explanation voice is interrupted, and the changed Playback of the second mode explanation voice corresponding to the production mode is started.
For example, when a left/right key button press operation is detected while mode explanation voice A is being played, and in response, the selected production mode is changed from production mode A to production mode B. , mode explanation voice A is interrupted and reproduction of mode explanation voice B is started in response to detection of a left/right key button pressing operation.

Further, when a pressing operation of the production button 5b (decision button) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted in response.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the mode explanation voice and the mode determination voice are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the mode-determining voice is always registered (assigned) to track y and reproduced by that track y.
Here, as described above, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the production mode to be selected is determined in response to the detection of the depression operation of the production button 5b, and the production mode that has been determined is Playback of the corresponding mode determination voice is started.
At this time, when a pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected while the mode explanation voice is being played back by track x, the playback of track x is stopped, and the determined production mode is Information specifying the playback of the mode decision voice corresponding to is registered.
As a result, when a pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected while the mode explanation voice is being played, the playback of the mode explanation voice is interrupted and the mode decision voice corresponding to the determined production mode is interrupted. starts playing.
For example, when a pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected while the mode explanation voice A is being played, and the selection of the production mode A is determined in response to this, in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the production button 5b, , mode explanation voice A is interrupted, and reproduction of mode determination voice A is started.

Further, when a pressing operation of the down key button (back button) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted in response.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(c), the mode explanation voice and button sound effect c are registered (assigned) to different tracks. Here, the button sound effect c and the mode determination voice are registered (assigned) to the same track. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the button sound effect c is always registered (assigned) to the track y and reproduced by the track y.
Here, as described above, while the performance mode selection screen is being displayed, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the performance mode selection screen to the customer waiting performance screen in response to detection of a press operation of the down key button. , button sound effect c starts playing.
At this time, if a press operation of the down key button is detected while the mode explanation voice is being played back by track x, the playback of track Information specifying playback is registered. Further, after the start of the reproduction of the button sound effect c, information specifying the reproduction of the sound production constituting the customer waiting performance (hereinafter referred to as "customer waiting performance sound") is registered in the track c.
As a result, when a press operation of the down key button is detected while the mode explanation voice is being played, the playback of the mode explanation voice is interrupted and the playback of the button sound effect c is started, and then , the playback of the customer waiting performance sound begins.
For example, if a pressing operation of the down key button is detected while the mode explanation voice A is being played, the mode explanation voice A is interrupted and the reproduction of the button sound effect c is started in response.

Further, if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly.
"A pending winning has occurred" means that the entry of a game ball into the starting holes 51 and 52 has been detected, that special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) has been acquired, This means that a reservation number designation command that specifies an increase in the number of reservations (Special Figure 1 reservation number or Special Figure 2 reservation number) has been received.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the mode explanation voice, pending winning sound, and variable effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the pending winning sound is always registered (assigned) to track a and reproduced by track a. On the other hand, the variable effect sound is always registered (assigned) to track b and is played back by track b.
The "pending winning sound" is a production sound (sound production) that suggests (announces) the occurrence of a pending winning. The pending winning sound is a sound effect (SE) made up of a predetermined performance length (performance time and production length). The duration of the pending winning sound is set to be shorter than the duration of the mode decision voice. In this embodiment, 1.0 [s] is defined as the production length of the pending winning sound. Then, the pending winning sound is reproduced (output) in response to the occurrence of a pending winning. That is, every time a pending winning occurs, the pending winning sound is played.
The "variable production sound" is production sound (sound production) that constitutes the special figure variation production.
Here, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the customer waiting production screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the acquired special figure game information) in response to the occurrence of a pending prize. At the same time, the screen shifts to the screen at the start of the variable display of special symbols based on the above screen, and the playback of the pending winning sound starts.
At this time, if a pending winning occurs while the mode explanation voice is being played by track x, the playback of track At the same time, information specifying the reproduction of the variable effect sound is registered in track b.
As a result, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted, and the reproduction of the pending winning sound and the variable effect sound are started.
For example, if a pending winning occurs while the mode explanation voice A is being played, the mode explaining voice A is interrupted and the reproduction of the pending winning sound and the variable effect sound are started.
As a result of the above, the situation where the playback of the mode explanation voice overlaps with the playback of the production sound related to the game (pending winning sound, variable production sound, etc.) is prevented, and the situation where the playback of the mode explanation voice interferes with the playback of the production sound related to the game is prevented. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, as described above, the mode decision voice is composed of a performance length of 5.0 [s]. As a result, the reproduction of the mode determination voice is completed (ended) after 5.0 [s] have elapsed from the start.
Particularly, as described above, if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly. On the other hand, even if a pending winning occurs during reproduction of the mode determining voice, the reproduction of the mode determining voice is not interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the mode decision voice, the pending winning sound, and the variable effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, as described above, the mode-determining voice is always registered (assigned) to track y and reproduced by track y. On the other hand, the pending winning sound is always registered (assigned) to track a and reproduced by track a. On the other hand, the variable effect sound is always registered (assigned) to track b and is played back by track b.
Here, as described above, while the production mode selection screen is being displayed, reproduction of the mode decision voice is started in response to detection of a pressing operation of the production button 5b (decision button). Then, normally, upon completion of the playback of the mode decision voice, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the production mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen that was being displayed when the game was interrupted). . That is, normally, the display of the production mode selection screen is maintained until the reproduction of the mode determination voice is completed.
However, if a pending winning occurs during the playback of the mode decision voice, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the performance mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the acquired special figure game information). The screen will shift to the screen at the start of the variable display of special symbols based on the above.
At this time, if a pending winning occurs while the mode determination voice is being played by track y, information specifying the playback of the pending winning sound is registered in track a while the playing of track y continues. At the same time, information specifying the reproduction of the variable effect sound is registered in track b.
As a result, when a pending winning occurs while the mode deciding voice is being played, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the performance mode selection screen to the in-game screen while continuing to play the mode deciding voice. At the same time, the reproduction of the pending prize winning sound and the reproduction of the variable effect sound are started. At this time, the mode determination voice is played to the end.
For example, if a pending winning occurs while the mode determining voice A is being played, the playing of the pending winning sound and the variable effect sound are started while the mode determining voice A continues to be played. At this time, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the production mode selection screen to the in-game screen in response to the occurrence of a pending prize.
As described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player the decision (confirmation) of the production mode selection, and to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the production mode selection has been confirmed. becomes possible.

On the other hand, as described above, the button sound effect c is composed of a production length of 1.0 [s]. As a result, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is completed (ended) after 1.0 [s] has elapsed from its start.
Particularly, as described above, if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly. On the other hand, even if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is not interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, the button sound effect c, the pending prize sound, and the variable effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, as described above, the button sound effect c is always registered (assigned) to the track y, and is played back by the track y. On the other hand, the pending winning sound is always registered (assigned) to track a and reproduced by track a. On the other hand, the variable effect sound is always registered (assigned) to track b and is played back by track b.
Here, as described above, while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the production mode selection screen to the customer waiting production screen in response to detection of a press operation of the down key button (back button). At the same time, the reproduction of the button sound effect c starts.
At this time, if a pending winning occurs while button sound effect c is being played by track y, information specifying the playback of the pending winning sound is registered in track a while track y continues playing. At the same time, information specifying the reproduction of the variable effect sound is registered in track b.
As a result, when a pending winning occurs while the button sound effect c is being played, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the production mode selection screen to the customer waiting production screen while continuing to play the button sound effect c. At the same time, the reproduction of the pending prize winning sound and the reproduction of the variable effect sound are started. At this time, the button sound effect c is played to the end.
As described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the production mode has been interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of the production mode has been interrupted. Become.

Here, in this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the pressing operation of the down key button (back button) is disabled while the mode explanation voice is being played (during the period from the start to the completion of the mode explanation voice playback). do not have.
That is, during the period from the start to the completion of the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, even if a press operation of the down key button (back button) is detected, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the production mode selection screen to the customer waiting production screen. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there is no transition to , and the reproduction of button sound effect c is not started.
In addition, in this embodiment, at least during playback of the mode decision voice (during the period from start to completion of playback of the mode decision voice), the left/right key button (selection button) and the down key button (back button) are pressed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation is disabled.
As a result, while the mode decision voice is playing, the production mode selection screen is being displayed, but even if the press operation of the left/right key button (selection button) is detected, the production mode selection screen will not be displayed. The configuration can be such that the type of the production mode explanation image g is not changed and the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is not started. Further, even if a press operation of the down key button (back button) is detected while the mode decision voice is being played back, the playback of the button sound effect c may not be started.

(Processing executed by the production control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU 310 of the production control board 300 will be explained.

(Sub CPU initialization processing)
First, the sub CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the production control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the production control board 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU 310 of the production control board 300 starts sub-CPU initialization processing (not shown) in response to generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
In the sub CPU initialization process, various registers, various timers, etc. used by the CPU 310 are initialized, and the CPU 310 is initialized. Next, a performance random number update process for updating various performance random numbers is executed. Thereafter, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described below are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the production control board 300 will be explained.
The CPU 310 of the production control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving the control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is memorized (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the production control board 300.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the production control board 300 will be explained.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing sub-timer interrupt processing.
The production control board 300 is configured to include a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the production control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sub-timer interrupt process is started, the process first moves to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved to the saving area of the DRAM 304.
In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process moves to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) provided in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, predetermined values (values corresponding to predetermined cycles) are added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process moves to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control commands stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the production control board 300 are analyzed, and processing according to the received control commands is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the performance is managed based on the performance scenario data set in the performance scenario setting area and the value of the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is any process data whose start time has arrived for each performance scenario data set in the performance scenario setting area. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each piece of command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (performance start command specifying the start of the display performance, display priority change command, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the sound performance (such as a performance start command specifying the start of the sound performance) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the lamp performance (such as a performance start command specifying the start of the lamp performance) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (such as a performance start command specifying the start of the movable body performance) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, register restoration processing is executed, and the sub-timer interrupt processing is ended. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be explained.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process moves to step S32-1, as shown in FIG. 51.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process moves to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether a setting value designation command has been received. When it is determined that a setting value designation command has been received, a value corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting value designation command is stored (set) in the setting value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the production control board 300.

In step S32-2, a gaming state command reception process is executed, and the process moves to step S32-3.
In the gaming state command reception process, it is determined whether a gaming state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a gaming state specifying command has been received, information specifying the gaming state ("normal state" or "time saving state") specified by the received gaming state specifying command is saved.
In step S32-3, pending command reception processing is executed, and the process moves to step S32-4. The pending command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, a prefetch command reception process is executed, and the process moves to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, variable command reception processing is executed, and the process moves to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process moves to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, opening command reception processing is executed, and the process moves to step S32-8. The opening command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-8, error command reception processing is executed, the series of processing ends, and the process moves to the next processing (step S31-4). In the error command reception process, it is determined whether an error designation command has been received. If it is determined that an error designation command has been received, processing for notifying the occurrence of the error specified by the received error designation command is executed.

(Pending command reception processing)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be explained.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pending command reception process.
When the pending command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process moves to step S36-1, as shown in FIG. 52.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the reservation number designation command has been received. If it is determined that the reservation number designation command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S36-2, and the reservation number designation command is received. If it is determined that the information has not been received (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (the pending number increases by "1"), and whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number. If it is determined that there is a pending number (Yes), the process moves to step S36-3, and it is determined that the pending number designation command does not specify an increase in the pending number (specifies that the pending number has decreased by "1"). If determined (No), the process moves to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reservation number designation command specifies an increase in the number of special drawings 1 reservation.
Then, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies an increase in the number of special figures 1 reservation, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter. In addition, a normal pending performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is started.
At this time, the mode corresponding to the value set in the production mode flag area is selected as the mode of the reserved symbol h.
In addition, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b2, a storage area (storage area 1 to memory A display position corresponding to area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies an increase in the number of special figures 2 reserved, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter. In addition, the normal pending performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, a pending symbol display area b3 is set as a display area for displaying the pending symbol h.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reservation number designation command specifies subtraction of the number of special drawings 1 reservation.
If it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 1 reserved number, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter. Furthermore, the display position of each pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the pending performance corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the pending symbol h corresponding to the terminated pending performance is ended.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed in the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed to the reserved symbol display area b2 (corresponding to the storage area 1). display position) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1. Shift to the display position corresponding to .
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2. Shift to the display position corresponding to .
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3. Shift to the display position corresponding to .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 2 reserved number, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter. Further, the display position of the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the pending performance corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the pending symbol h corresponding to the terminated pending performance is ended.
Further, the display position of the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is shifted from the reserved symbol display area b3 to the reserved symbol display area b1.

(Prefetch command reception processing)
Next, the prefetch command reception process in step S32-4 will be explained.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the prefetch command reception process.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process moves to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 53.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received. If it is determined that a prefetch designation command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S33-2, and if a prefetch designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no one (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a prefetch information analysis process is executed, and the process moves to step S33-3. In the prefetch information analysis process, the information specified by the prefetch designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the production control board 300 as pending information.
The DRAM 304 of the production control board 300 is set with a pending information storage area that can store pending information. In addition, as a reservation information storage area, a first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and a second reservation information storage area corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
The first pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. In the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 gaming information storage area is stored. That is, the reservation information stored in the storage area 1 of the first reservation information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the reservation information stored in the storage area 2 of the first reservation information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the reservation information stored in the storage area 3 of the first reservation information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the reservation information stored in the storage area 4 of the first reservation information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

The second pending information storage area is configured to include one storage area as a storage area capable of storing pending information. Then, in the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 gaming information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information is configured to include symbol information indicating the type of stopped symbol.

In the prefetch information analysis process, first, it is determined whether the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
If it is determined that the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol specified by the prefetch designation command ("missing symbol" or "jackpot symbol") is analyzed. Then, pending information including symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stopped symbol is generated. Then, the generated suspension information is stored (saved) in the first suspension information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol specified by the prefetch designation command ("missing symbol", "big hit symbol", or "small hit symbol") is determined to correspond to the second special symbol lottery. symbol) is analyzed to generate pending information including symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stopped symbol. Then, the generated reservation information is stored (saved) in the second reservation information storage area.
In the following description, the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage area in step S33-2 will be referred to as "pre-read target suspension information." Furthermore, among the suspension information stored in the first suspension information storage area, suspension information for which notification display (fluctuating display and stop display) is performed before the pre-read target suspension information is referred to as "advance suspension information."

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (No), the process moves to step S33-4, and the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes ends and the process moves to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, during execution of the pre-read preview performance, "1" is set in the pre-read preview performance flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-read preview performance is being executed based on whether "1" is set in the pre-read preview performance flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions are satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions are satisfied (Yes), the process moves to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions are If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, (1) the pre-read target pending information is pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "1") or more of advance pending information is stored. (3) There is no advance pending information indicating the winning symbol (“jackpot symbol” or “small prize symbol”); (4) time saving control is stopped; (5) jackpot game state. is not occurring, it is determined that the pre-read preview effect execution condition is satisfied.
Note that the contents of the pre-read preview performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. In other words, as a configuration in which it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance execution condition is satisfied when one or more of the conditions (1) to (5) above are satisfied, rather than all of the conditions (1) to (5) above. I don't mind. In addition, other conditions different from the conditions (1) to (5) above may be included as the pre-read preview performance execution conditions.

In step S33-5, a pre-read preview effect lottery process is executed, and the process moves to step S33-6. In the pre-read preview performance lottery process, a pre-read preview performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-read preview performance lottery table in which winning values for the pre-read preview performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-read preview performance lottery process, first, a pre-read preview performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired pre-read preview performance lottery random number and the pre-read preview performance lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the player has won the pre-read preview effect lottery executed in step S33-5. If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the pre-read preview performance lottery has been unsuccessful (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, a pre-read preview effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-read notice performance setting process, the contents of the pre-read notice performance (pending notice performance) are selected and set. At this time, the mode corresponding to the value set in the production mode flag area is selected and set as the mode of the pre-read preview performance.

(Fluctuating command reception processing)
Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be explained.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the fluctuation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process moves to step S34-1, as shown in FIG. 54.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is received. If it is determined that the information has not been received (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S34-3. In the stop performance determination process, a stop performance number (aspect of the stop performance) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop performance determination process, the stop performance number (stop performance mode) is determined based on the type of stop symbol specified by the symbol type specification command and the value set in the performance mode flag area. do. Then, the determined stop performance number is stored in the stop performance number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S34-4. In the variable effect determination process, the contents of the special figure variable effect are selected and set.
The control ROM 302 of the production control board 300 contains a combination (variable length pattern) of a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern), a variation production number (aspect of special figure variation production), A fluctuating effect lottery table in which correspondences of , , and the like are registered is stored.
Further, as a variable performance lottery table, a variable performance lottery table corresponding to each performance mode (“performance mode A” to “performance mode C”) is stored.
In the variable effect determination process, first, the value set in the effect mode flag area is confirmed, and the variable effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, among the variable effect numbers registered in the variable effect lottery table, the variable effect number corresponding to the combination of the variable mode number specified by the variable mode specification command and the variable pattern number specified by the variable pattern specification command is selected. Decide (select).

In step S34-4, a preview effect determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S34-5. In the preview performance determination process, the content of the main preview performance is selected and set.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a preview performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the preview performance random number and the main preview performance number (aspect of the main preview performance) is registered.
Further, as a preview performance lottery table, a preview performance lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value set in the performance mode flag area and the variable performance number is stored.
To determine the mode of the main preview performance, first, a preview performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the value set in the performance mode flag area and the variable performance number selected in step S34-3 are confirmed, and the advance notice performance lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the main preview performance number is determined (determined) based on the acquired preview performance lottery random number and the read preview performance lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, performance scenario data for the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the variable effect number determined in step S34-3 is read. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area.
Further, the performance scenario data corresponding to the main preview performance number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the main preview performance is started at a predetermined timing while the variable performance is being executed.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command receiving process in step S32-6 will be explained.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command receiving process is executed in step S32-6, the process moves to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 55.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S35-2, and if a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no one (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect start process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop performance start process, the contents of the stop performance are selected and set.
Specifically, in the stop performance setting process, the stop performance number stored in the stop performance number storage area is acquired, and the performance scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop performance number is read. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, a stop performance (stop display of performance symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception process in step S32-7 will be explained.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process moves to step S39-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S39-2 and the opening designation command is not received. If it is determined that there is no one (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S31-4).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, the content of the winning effect is selected and set.
Specifically, in the winning performance setting process, when the special game state (big hit game state or small win game state) to be started corresponds to "first win", performance scenario data corresponding to "BIG bonus performance" is read out. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the "BIG bonus performance" is started.
On the other hand, if the special game state to be started (jackpot game state or small win game state) corresponds to the "REG bonus" won based on the first special symbol lottery, the performance scenario data corresponding to the "REG bonus performance" is read out. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the "REG bonus effect" is started.

(Function of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, if the game start condition is satisfied (a pending winning occurs) while the mode explanation voice is being played while the production mode is being selected (while the production mode selection screen is being displayed), the playback of the mode explanation voice is terminated. Then, playback of performance sounds related to the game (pending winning sound, variable performance sound, etc.) is started. This prevents the situation where the mode explanation voice notification overlaps with the presentation sound notification regarding the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification of the mode explanation voice from interfering with the notification of the effect sounds related to the game.
On the other hand, if the game start condition is met (a pending winning occurs) during the playback of the mode decision voice triggered by the confirmation of the production mode selection, the playback of the mode decision voice will not end and the production sound related to the game will be played. (Pending winning sound, variable performance sound, etc.) starts playing. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player the selection of the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been confirmed.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of a production mode has been confirmed, and to suppress a decrease in the production effect of production sounds related to the game. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the game start condition is satisfied (pending winning) while the button sound effect c is being played, which is triggered by the interruption of the production mode selection (detection of the pressing operation of the down key button (back button)). In this case, the playback of the effect sound related to the game (such as the pending winning sound, the variable effect sound, etc.) is started without ending the playback of the button sound effect c. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the performance mode is to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been interrupted.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation for interrupting the performance mode (pressing the down key button (back button)) is disabled during playback of the mode explanation voice. That is, it is prohibited to interrupt the selection of the presentation mode while the mode explanation voice is being played. As a result, the notification of the mode explanation voice will not be interrupted due to interruption of selection of the production mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect of the mode explanation voice.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the performance length of the mode explanation voice is longer than the performance length of the mode determination voice. As a result, if the game start condition is satisfied (a pending winning occurs) during the notification of the mode decision voice triggered by the confirmation of the production mode selection, the notification of the mode decision voice will be changed to the production sound related to the game (the pending winning sound). , variable effect sounds, etc.), and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the effect of the effect of the effect sounds related to the game.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, if the game start condition is satisfied (a pending winning occurs) while playing the mode decision voice triggered by the confirmation of the production mode selection, the corresponding image (production The display of the mode selection screen) is finished, and the display of images related to the game (playing screen) is started. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been finalized, and to suppress a decrease in the performance effect of images related to the game.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the mode explanation voice and the mode decision voice each include a button sound effect (SE), and button sound effect a included in the mode explanation voice and button sound effect a included in the mode decision voice are Button sound effect b has different contents. This makes it possible for the player to clearly distinguish between changing the performance mode to be selected and confirming the selection of the performance mode.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the mode explanation voice includes a button sound effect (SE: sound effect) a and a mode explanation voice (voice), and the mode explanation voices corresponding to different performance modes each include a button sound effect (SE) a and a mode explanation voice (voice). The sound effect a is common, but the mode explanation sounds are different. This makes it possible to diversify the mode explanation voice while making it clear that the sound corresponds to the selected production mode.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various changes can be made to the embodiments described above.
For example, in the above embodiment, if the game start condition is satisfied (a pending winning occurs) while the mode explanation voice is being played while the production mode is being selected (while the production mode selection screen is being displayed), the mode explanation voice will not be played. After the game is finished, the playback of effect sounds related to the game (pending winning sound, fluctuating effect sound, etc.) is started.
However, if the game start condition is met (a pending winning occurs) while the mode explanation voice is being played while the production mode is being selected (while the production mode selection screen is being displayed), the mode explanation voice continues to be played. Then, the volume of the mode explanation voice may be set to "0" (muted state), and then the playback of the effect sounds related to the game (hold winning sound, variable effect sound, etc.) may be started.
This configuration also prevents the situation where the notification of the mode explanation voice overlaps the notification of the effect sound related to the game, and prevents the situation where the notification of the mode explanation voice interferes with the notification of the effect sound related to the game.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, even if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is not interrupted.
However, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c may be interrupted accordingly.
Alternatively, when a pending winning occurs while button sound effect c is being played, the volume of button sound effect c may be set to "0" (mute) while button sound effect c continues to be played. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is

1 Pachinko machine 22 Various speakers 31a Display screen 200 Main control board 300 Production control board

Claims (2)

If a game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the first performance sound during the selection of the performance mode, the notification of the first performance sound is ended and the notification of the performance sound related to the game is started,
If the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started without the notification of the second effect sound being terminated. ,
If the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the third effect sound triggered by the interruption of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started without the notification of the third effect sound being terminated. A gaming machine. If a game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the first performance sound during the selection of the performance mode, the notification of the first performance sound is ended and the notification of the performance sound related to the game is started,
If the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started without the notification of the second effect sound being terminated. ,
A gaming machine in which an operation for interrupting the selection of a performance mode is disabled during notification of the first performance sound .

Images